manualshive.com logo in svg

Panasonic KX-NCP1000, Programming Manual

The Panasonic KX-NCP1000 Operating Manual is available for free download on our website. This comprehensive manual provides detailed instructions on how to use and optimize the features of the KX-NCP1000 system. Get the most out of your Panasonic product by downloading the manual from manualshive.com.

Share
Download
background image

2.1.4  Card Status

Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS)
status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card
status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 

2.1.1  Starting

Maintenance Console and Software Modes

).

•

"In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.

•

"Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed
from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.

•

"Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more
information, see the Installation Manual.

For details about how to change the status of a card, see 

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card

(Interactive mode only)

 on screen 

3.1  [1-1] Slot

.

34

PC Programming Manual

2.1.4 Card Status

Summary of Contents for KX-NCP1000

Page 1: ...efully before using this product and save this manual for future use KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 4 1000 or later KX TDE100 KX TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 4 1000 or later KX TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 4 1000 or later Model No KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 KX TDE600 ...

Page 2: ...Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference Feature Guide References The Feature Guide explains what the PBX can do as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your reference Installation Manual References The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the instal...

Page 3: ...n or enter the power saving system standby mode while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX To perform either of the operations above first close the connection to the PBX Trademarks Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other trademarks identified herein are the property...

Page 4: ...ted Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN primary rate access ONP 2048 kbit s digital structured leased lines D2048S The KX TDE600UK KX TDE600NE and KX TDE600GR are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network...

Page 5: ...launcher Connect Profile Setup 44 2 3 File 45 2 3 1 File Close 45 2 3 2 File Save 46 2 3 3 File Save As 47 2 3 4 File Exit 48 2 4 Disconnect 49 2 4 1 Disconnect Disconnect 49 2 5 Tool 50 2 5 1 Tool SD memory backup 50 2 5 2 Tool BRI Automatic Configuration 51 2 5 3 Tool NDSS Link Data Clear 52 2 5 4 Tool DXDP All OUS 53 2 5 5 Tool Simplified Voice Message Delete All Recording 54 2 5 6 Tool Simplif...

Page 6: ... Virtual IP Gateway GK Settings 175 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings 176 3 12 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway DN2IP 183 3 13 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Hunt Pattern 185 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension 186 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension 193 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Connection Command 202...

Page 7: ... 54 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Connection Command KX TDE series only 431 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension KX TDE series only 432 3 56 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Common Settings KX TDE series only 436 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only 438 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property 444 3 59 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command 450 3 60 1 1 Slot OPB3 O...

Page 8: ...5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings 664 5 24 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Member List 666 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group 667 5 26 3 9 PS Ring Group Member List 669 5 27 3 10 Conference Group 670 5 28 3 10 Conference Group Member List 672 6 4 Extension 673 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 674 6 2 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate 711 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD ...

Page 9: ...Plan Time Time Setting 872 10 5 8 4 Routing Plan Priority 873 10 6 8 5 Carrier 874 10 7 8 6 Leading Number Exception 877 10 8 8 7 Authorisation Code for TRG 878 11 9 Private Network 879 11 1 9 1 TIE Table 880 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission 884 11 3 9 3 Network Operator VoIP 888 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table 890 12 10 CO Incoming Call 893 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings 894 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settin...

Page 10: ...are File Version 2 0xxx 966 14 1 4 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2 01xx 967 14 1 5 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 3 0xxx 968 14 1 6 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 4 1xxx 970 14 1 7 KX TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3 0xxx 971 14 1 8 KX TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 4 1xxx 973 Feature Programming References 975 10 PC Programming Manual Ta...

Page 11: ...Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX PC Programming Manual 11 ...

Page 12: ...o enter programming mode will be denied access Ways to Programme There are two programming methods PC Personal Computer Programming All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through PC programming with Maintenance Console Installing and starting the Maintenance Console is described in Section 1 2 PC Programming Individual PC programming items are described in Section 2 Introduction of...

Page 13: ... on a white background below can be used when storing a name message password or other text entry data using a PC The available characters vary according to the model of PBX Table 1 Standard PC Programming Manual 13 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 14: ...Table 2 For CE model 14 PC Programming Manual 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 15: ...Table 3 For RU model PC Programming Manual 15 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 16: ...Table 4 For GR model 16 PC Programming Manual 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 17: ...s or Windows 7 Professional you must be logged in as a user in the Administrators group 1 Copy the setup file of the Maintenance Console to your PC 2 Double click the setup file to run the installer 3 Follow the on screen instructions provided by the installation wizard Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items Quick Setup When you start the Maintenance Console with the Instal...

Page 18: ...y area data of the PBX Replacement may take several minutes to complete b Follow the procedure described in 3 13 1 Starting the PBX for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 3 13 1 Starting the PBX for KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or 3 15 1 Starting the PBX for KX TDE600 in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX c Repeat step 5 to reconnect the Maintenance Console to the PBX 8 Follow the instructions of the Quick Setu...

Page 19: ...te properly if these IP addresses are changed A DHCP server must be able to use a client identifier option specified by RFC 2131 The PBX will not start properly if the IP addresses cannot be assigned automatically by the DHCP server when DHCP Client is set to Enable In this case you need to consult your network administrator because the DHCP server on your network may not be running or a network f...

Page 20: ...he installation of the Maintenance Console It can also be enabled in Options Note When starting the Maintenance Console if there is less than 80 MB of available memory this feature is automatically disabled Only one user can access Maintenance Console or PBX Web Manager at any given time To start PBX Web Manager 1 If the PC is not the Web server Launch a Web browsing application and enter the foll...

Page 21: ... be automatically displayed for easy access to your PBX 3 Click Connect PBX Web Manager Main Menu After successful login the main menu will appear where settings can be changed Note While logged in if there is no activity for approximately 10 minutes PBX Web Manager will automatically disconnect PC Programming Manual 21 1 2 1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console ...

Page 22: ...mmer code to access installer level PC programming All system programming settings are available The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console For more information about programmer codes see 2 1 2 Access Levels CAUTION To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password 1 Please provide all system passwords to the customer 2 To avoid unauthor...

Page 23: ...Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX PC Programming Manual 23 ...

Page 24: ...mmer code 2 Click OK The programme launcher will appear 3 Click Connect Connection options will be displayed Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre saved profile This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the syst...

Page 25: ...ion Modem Initialise Enter the modem initialise command and click Initialise to send the command to the modem For more details refer to your modem s instruction manual Connection Settings for LAN Setting Values Explanation IP Address 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN Enter the same IP address that was input in IP Address for IPCMPR Card for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 K...

Page 26: ...DN Remote Setting Values Explanation Dial Number 30 digits consisting of 1 9 0 and comma Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the PBX 26 PC Programming Manual 2 1 1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes ...

Page 27: ... initial description of that menu option for example This option is only available at Installer level If a sentence like this does not appear under the heading the menu option is available at all levels The target users for each access level are as follows Access Level User User For end users Administrator For system administrators Installer For dealers and system installers The options available ...

Page 28: ...Simplified Voice Message Delete All Recording ü Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usage ü Call Pickup for My Group ü ü Extension List View ü ü ü ü ü ü Import Feature Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü ü ü Import Incoming Call DDI DID Table ü ü Import ARS Leading Digit ü ü Import ARS Except Code ü ü Import ARS Routing Plan ü ü Import Wired Extension ü ü Import PS Extension ü ü Import Quick Dial ...

Page 29: ...ion ü ü Export SIP Extension ü ü Export V IPGW16 GW Settings ü ü Export V IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü Screen Customize User Level ü ü Screen Customize Administrator Level ü ü Utility Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Diagnosis ü ü ü File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card ü File Transfer PBX SD Card to PC ü SD Card File View and Load ü SD Card File Delete ü Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü Message File Tran...

Page 30: ...o IP Equipment NT3xx ü Card Software Timed Update ü System Reset Reset by the Command ü View Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Toolbar ü ü ü ü ü ü Statusbar ü ü ü ü ü ü System Menu ü ü ü ü ü ü Window Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Cascade ü ü ü ü ü ü Tile Horz ü ü ü ü ü ü Tile Vert ü ü ü ü ü ü Help Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Help ü ü ü ü ü ü Additional Information...

Page 31: ...ded into several areas as shown below 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Menu Bar Provides access to file management and connection options as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX For details see Sections 2 3 File to 2 7 Help 2 Tool Bar Provides easy access to commonly used software functions Two tool bars are provided as follows PC Programming Manual 31 2 1 3 Software Interface ...

Page 32: ...expanded sub topic will hide the names of individual screens Double click on a screen name to open that screen in 6 Main Screen below This menu can be positioned freely Click and drag the title bar of the menu to move it to another position It will automatically snap in to either the left side or right side of the main window if released there Otherwise it will float separately from the main windo...

Page 33: ...l standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console The standard buttons are as follows Button Function OK Implements changes and closes the current screen Cancel Abandons changes and returns to the previous screen Close Keeps any changes implemented and closes the current screen Apply Implements changes and remains on the same screen Refresh Implements changes upd...

Page 34: ...ns that the card is installed correctly in the PBX and is capable of being used normally Out of service means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX but has been temporarily removed from use This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded Fault means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly or is not functioning correctly For more information see the Installation...

Page 35: ...the bottom of the Maintenance Console window System Menu Displays or hides the menu of PBX setting screens Window Cascade When multiple data screens are open displays all open screens overlapped with the title bars visible Tile Horz When multiple data screens are open displays all open screens side by side Tile Vert When multiple data screens are open displays all open screens vertically PC Progra...

Page 36: ...nge Wired Extension Portable Station VM Group DPT VM Group DTMF ICD Group PS Ring Group OGM DISA External Pager Analogue MODEM ISDN Remote Extension Numbers Names List Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type and names Click entries to select them and click the Add button when finished to add the selected extensions To deselect an entry click it again Value Range M...

Page 37: ...e created here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card Note Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all previous settings Use only when necessary To create a new system data file 1 From the programme launcher select New 2 Click the appropriate model number 3 Click OK PC Programmi...

Page 38: ...s that were created by the Maintenance Console for a supported PBX To upload a file opened here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card To open a system data file 1 From the programme launcher select Open The Open dialogue box will be displayed 2 Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open 3 Select the file 4 Click Op...

Page 39: ...ofile This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the RS 2...

Page 40: ... a Profile Name if you want to use a pre saved profile a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the USB radio button is selected a Enter th...

Page 41: ...ored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the LAN radio button is selected a Specify the settings as required For more details see the table below b Enter the system password for the PBX 3 Click Connect Connection Settings for LAN Setting Values Explanation IP Address 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Specify the IP a...

Page 42: ...password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the Modem radio button is selected a Specify the settings as required For more details see the table below b Enter the system password for the PBX 3 Click Connect Connection Settings for Modem Setting Values Description Dial Number 1 9 0 comma T P...

Page 43: ...ISDN Remote 1 From the programme launcher select Connect The Login window will be displayed 2 Select a connection option Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre saved profile a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need t...

Page 44: ...ckup of all profiles This allows you to use the original connection settings with the new Maintenance Console The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows Button Function Profile File Opens or saves profiles as separate files Save current profile Overwrites the previous settings with the current settings when a profile already exists A confirmation message will be displayed Save as n...

Page 45: ... the programme launcher To close a system data file From the File menu select Close If the system data file has not been saved a warning message will be displayed giving you the option to save the file Click Yes to save the file Click No to abandon the changes PC Programming Manual 45 2 3 1 File Close ...

Page 46: ...upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card To save a system data file From the File menu select Save If the data has never been saved the Save dialogue box will be displayed For more details see 2 3 3 File Save As 46 PC Programming Manual 2 3 2 File Save ...

Page 47: ...sfer PC to PBX SD Card To save a system data file with a new name 1 From the File menu select Save As 2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file 3 Enter a file name or select a file to overwrite 4 Click Save If choosing to overwrite another file a warning message will be displayed Click Yes to overwrite Click No to return to the previous screen PC Programming Manual 47 2 3 3 File ...

Page 48: ... Console From the File menu select Exit If the system data file being modified has not been saved a warning message will be displayed giving you the option to save the file Click Yes to save the file Click No to abandon the changes 48 PC Programming Manual 2 3 4 File Exit ...

Page 49: ...he PBX When this option is chosen system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card see 2 5 1 Tool SD memory backup To disconnect 1 From the Disconnect menu select Disconnect A confirmation message will be displayed 2 Click Yes PC Programming Manual 49 2 4 1 Disconnect Disconnect ...

Page 50: ...ry backup Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen To back up system data From the Tool menu select SD memory backup 50 PC Programming Manual 2 5 1 Tool SD memory backup ...

Page 51: ...tus At any time on this screen you can click Close to return to the previous screen without saving To configure the BRI card 1 From the Tool menu select BRI Automatic Configuration 2 Select the BRI card to configure by clicking the Check cell and setting it to ON 3 Click OK The ports associated with the selected BRI card will be displayed on a new screen 4 Enter suitable Subscriber Numbers for the...

Page 52: ...rs it at the connected PBX To clear this data at other PBXs in the network it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs To clear the NDSS Link Data From the Tool menu select NDSS Link Data Clear A confirmation screen will be displayed Click OK to clear the data Click Cancel to keep the data and close the screen 52 PC Programming Manual 2 5 3 Tool NDSS Link Data Clear ...

Page 53: ...DP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP XDP extension ports to OUS simultaneously To set all DXDP XDP ports to OUS 1 From the Tool menu select DXDP All OUS 2 Click OK PC Programming Manual 53 2 5 4 Tool DXDP All OUS ...

Page 54: ...es recorded by the SVM feature To delete voice messages 1 From the Tool menu point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording 2 Select the card from which to delete messages 3 Click OK 54 PC Programming Manual 2 5 5 Tool Simplified Voice Message Delete All Recording ...

Page 55: ...s stored by the SVM feature For each message the type of message and the associated extension are displayed To view SVM message status From the Tool menu point to Simplified Voice Message and select Check Current Usage PC Programming Manual 55 2 5 6 Tool Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usage ...

Page 56: ... Group The Group Call Pickup feature number default 40 the extension user group number of the extension is assigned to first personal speed dial Note This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to 0 0 is not used for another feature number The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned The Personal Speed...

Page 57: ...Type Detail Intercom Wired Extension VM Voice Mail Portable Station Wireless Extension Portable Station ICDG Incoming Call Distribution Group WG PS Ring Group VM DPT VM DPT Group VM DTMF VM DTMF Group Pager External Pager MODEM Analogue Modem ISDN Remote ISDN Modem OGM DISA DISA DSS DSS Console DPT I F CS PT interface CS SVM SVM Feature SIP IP PT IP Telephone To view extension information From the...

Page 58: ...ial and Caller ID Data Type Import Destination System Speed Dialling Number Location Name Name CO Line Access Number Telephone Number Dial CLI Destination CLI Destination Related programming 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Incoming Call DDI DID Table Data Type Import Destination Location Location DDI DID Number Dial In Number DDI DID Name Dial In Name DDI DID Destination Day Destination Day DDI DID Dest...

Page 59: ...t Related programming 10 3 8 3 Routing Plan Time Wired Extension Data Type Import Destination No Location selected automatically Extension Number Extension Number selected automatically Extension Name Extension Name selected automatically Related programming 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings PS Extension Data Type Import Destination No Location selected automatically Extension Number 1 ...

Page 60: ...sword Related programming 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port V IPGW16 GW Settings Data Type Import Destination No Location GW Name GW Name GW IP Address GW IP Address GW Group GW Group No Connection for IP GW16 Connection for IP GW16 Protocol Protocol Progress Tone Send Mode Progress Tone Send Mode IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 2nd IP Codec Prior...

Page 61: ...d 5 For the Feature Speed Dial and Caller ID table select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data system or tenant from the drop down list 6 If required select import fields When import fields can be selected the selection screen is displayed automatically Matching origin and destination fields are entered by default To change the destination for an import field select the preferred field...

Page 62: ...Panel To export system data 1 From the Tool menu point to Export and then click the type of data to export 2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file 3 Enter a file name 4 Click Save When export fields are automatically selected the file will be saved When export fields can be selected the selection screen will be displayed automatically 5 For the Feature Speed Dial and Caller ID ...

Page 63: ...ce Console and in the menu bar to users with the level of access being edited To modify displayed screens 1 From the Tool menu point to Screen Customize and then click the access level to modify 2 Select the items that you want to have displayed Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed ...

Page 64: ...16 ESLC16 EMSLC16 CSLC16 ECSLC24 CSIF LCOT ELCOT T1 E1 BRI PRI OPB E M DID IP EXT Card CT Bus diagnosis KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 only DHLC DLC SLC8 SLC16 MSLC16 CSLC16 CSIF LCOT T1 E1 BRI PRI OPB E M DID IP EXT DTMF Receive test port DHLC SLC8 SLC16 MSLC16 ESLC16 EMSLC16 CSLC16 ECSLC24 E M DID PT loop back diagnosis DHLC DLC DSP DTMF generator receiver diagnosis T1 E1 DSP DTMF rece...

Page 65: ...ed for the pair port tests must be installed within the same shelf The tests that are performed are as follows Line current OFF Ext CO Line current from extension to trunk turns off Line current ON Ext CO Line current from extension to trunk turns on Off hook detection CO Ext Off hook generation detection from trunk to extension DTMF detection CO Ext DTMF generation detection from trunk to extensi...

Page 66: ... The version of the PRI23 card must be 2 000 or later To perform a network loopback test 1 From the Utility menu select Diagnosis 2 Click on the Status cell of the PRI23 card and set it to OUS 3 Click on the cell showing the card type A new window will be displayed 4 Select the Loopback Type option A new window will be displayed 5 Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you ...

Page 67: ...nd LIC files Use the Activation Key button see 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key for other LIC files and the SD Card File View and Load utility see 2 6 4 Utility SD Card File View and Load for all other files The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things whether the file contains supported data and which system component the file applies to Only files whose header information m...

Page 68: ...6 EMSLC16 PEESLC ECSLC24 PELCOT ELCOT PEECHO EECHO PBUSS BUS S CS Programme Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit PCSDECT CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable Station PDCSDECT CS using a DHLC DLC card for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT High density CS for DECT Portable Station PCS24G CS using a CSIF card for 2 4 GHz Portable Station PDCS24G CS using a DHLC DLC card for 2 4 GHz Portable Stati...

Page 69: ... SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DGSYS IPCEMPR DGSYS_S IPCEMPR 1 1 DGSYS file format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as DGSYS_S Language Data Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit DLNG0 DLNG5 PT DVMLNG1 DVMLNG5 VPS Display Guidance data Activation Key Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card LIC00 LIC99 V IPEXT32 V SIPEXT32 V IPGW16 V SIPGW16 Default Value Data KX N...

Page 70: ...IPGW16 DBIVIPEX V IPEXT32 DBIVSPEX V SIPEXT32 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DMINI IPCMPR DMIDHLC DHLC8 DMISLC SLC8 CSLC16 DMIDLC DLC8 DLC16 DMIBRI BRI DMICSINF CSIF DMILCOT LCOT8 LCOT16 DMIT1 T1 DMIE1 E1 DMIEM E M DMIOPB3 OPB3 DMIEIO EIO DMIIPGW2 IP GW4 DMIIPGW3 IP GW16 DMIPRI23 PRI23 DMIPRI30 PRI30 70 PC Programming Manual 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD C...

Page 71: ...INI IPCEMPR DGIDHLC DHLC8 DGISLC SLC8 EMSLC16 ESLC16 CSLC16 ECSLC24 DGIDLC DLC8 DLC16 DGIBRI BRI DGICSINF CSIF DGILCOT ELCOT16 DGIT1 T1 DGIE1 E1 DGIEM E M DGIOPB3 OPB3 DGIEIO EIO DGIIPGW2 IP GW4 DGIIPGW3 IP GW16 DGIPRI23 PRI23 DGIPRI30 PRI30 DGIDID DID8 DGIIPEXT IP EXT16 DGIVIPGW V IPGW16 DGIVSPGW V SIPGW16 DGIVIPEX V IPEXT32 DGIVSPEX V SIPEXT32 PC Programming Manual 71 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer...

Page 72: ...2 Select the file to upload A window showing the upload progress will be displayed While transferring files to the SD memory card the PBX automatically renames them according to the header information A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete 3 Click OK 72 PC Programming Manual 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card ...

Page 73: ... analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem If there is only one error data file its name will be SYSERR If there is more than one file the files will be numbered in chronological order up to a maximum of 9 files To transfer files to the PC 1 From the Utility menu select File Transfer PBX SD Card to PC 2 Select the file to download from the list of files on the SD memory card Only...

Page 74: ...m the Utility menu select SD Card File View and Load 2 Click on the name of the desired file Only files containing programme data whose filenames start with P can be selected 3 Click Detail The Detail screen will be displayed Header information from the chosen SD memory card file is displayed on the left 4 From the Card drop down list on the right select the card s whose software you want to updat...

Page 75: ...ility KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 PBMPR DBSYS KX TDE100 KX TDE200 PMMPR DMSYS KX TDE600 PGMPR DGSYS To delete files from the SD memory card 1 From the Utility menu select SD Card File Delete 2 Click on the file to be deleted 3 Click Delete A confirmation screen will be displayed 4 Click OK The display will return to the SD Card File Delete screen PC Programming Manual 75 2 6 5 Utility SD Card File Delete...

Page 76: ...the file s header information Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary If this location already contains an OGM it will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message To transfer OGMs to an MSG ESVM card block 1 From the Utility menu select Message File Transfer PC to PBX 2 Select the target MSG ESVM card block or ALL from the drop down list and click OK The Open dialogue box will be di...

Page 77: ... Message File Transfer PBX to PC 2 From the upper drop down list select the target MSG ESVM card block 3 From the lower drop down list select the messages to transfer To transfer a certain message select the number of that message To transfer all messages at once select ALL The Save dialogue box will be displayed 4 Enter a file name 5 Click Save 6 Click OK When you choose to transfer all messages ...

Page 78: ...text file Minor Displays minor errors which affect only a certain part of system operation Major Displays major errors which affect operation of the whole system or result in system failure Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the PBX Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions The items displayed on screen are as follows Item Descri...

Page 79: ...ilt in ESVM card 01 to 11 Free Slots KX TDE600 Physical slot Basic Shelf 00 to 10 00 IPCEMPR Card Slot Built in ESVM card 01 to 10 Free Slots Expansion Shelf 01 to 12 01 to 11 Free Slots 12 BUS S Card Slot KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 KX TDE600 Virtual slot 01 to 08 01 to 04 Virtual Trunk Slots 05 to 08 Virtual Extension Slots ZZ Port number For optional service cards except OPB3 card ...

Page 80: ...To view the error log From the Utility menu select Error Log 80 PC Programming Manual 2 6 8 Utility Error Log ...

Page 81: ...e versa will be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed To view signalling bit information 1 From the Utility menu select T1 E1 Signalling Bit Monitor 2 From the Slot No drop down list select the target slot 3 From the Interval Timer drop down list select the number of seconds between each automatic screen refresh 4 Click Start Monitoring will be performed and the screen will...

Page 82: ...ility menu select T1 E1 Line Trace 2 From the Slot No drop down list select the target slot 3 From the CH No drop down list select the target channel 4 Click Start Trace information will be displayed The information is automatically updated whenever the data being monitored changes 5 Click Stop to end the trace 6 Select an option Click Capture to save the displayed trace information Information is...

Page 83: ...tton is clicked Accumulation Trace Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed Error Accumulation Trace Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed This trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets To view trace data 1 From the Utility menu select ISDN QSIG Protocol Trace 2 From the Slot No drop down list select the target slot 3 From the Trace ...

Page 84: ...W16 Protocol Trace When the progress bar disappears the protocol trace is complete The trace data has been saved to the SD Memory Card file name PRTH323 To transfer trace data to the PC 1 From the Utility menu select File Transfer PBX SD Card to PC The trace data will be displayed 2 Select the desired trace data file 3 Click Transfer 4 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file 5 En...

Page 85: ...ss of Signal RAI 301 Digital trunk RAI signal reception AIS 302 Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception Frame Failure 300 Digital trunk frame failure Loss of Frame Counter of minor communication error CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error SF Severely errored frame or Severe Framing Error FE Frame synchronisation bit error LV Line Code Violation SL Controlled slip To view digital trunk informat...

Page 86: ... to arrive To view IP extension information 1 From the Utility menu select IP Extension Statistical Information 2 From the Card Selection drop down list select the slot number for the card IPCMPR VoIP DSP for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR VoIP DSP for KX TDE600 can be selected for the DSP card when DSP Card Status is enabled See 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX...

Page 87: ... the display shows OFF The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS model For more details see the documentation for your CS Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS Ring Group To view CS information 1 From the Utility menu select CS Information 2 From the Target CSI F Slot No drop down list select the target slot To display information on a single...

Page 88: ...ollows Item Description PS No PS location number Only registered PSs will be displayed Extension Number Extension number of the PS Location Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with Location Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with To view PS information 1 From the Utility menu select PS Information 2 Click Refresh 88 PC Programming Manual 2 6 16 Utility PS Informa...

Page 89: ...sed with CS ID 12 digit ID number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with Monitored Value Monitored value dBm of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with Monitored Level Monitored level signal strength level of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with To monitor the status of CSs 1 From the Utility menu select CS Status Monitor 2 From the Interval Timer drop down ...

Page 90: ...available when the Maintenance Console is in Interactive mode To perform a Ping test 1 Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box 2 Click Test to perform the test The result will be displayed 3 Select an option Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information 1 Enter a file name or select a file to overwrite 2 Click Save Click Close to return to the Ping screen 90 PC Programming ...

Page 91: ...ility menu select File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment and then either IP CS or NT400 2 Input the FTP Server Address and File Name 3 Put a check in the Select check boxes of the items to be updated 4 Click Timed Update The Timed Update screen appears For information on setting this screen see 2 6 21 Utility Card Software Timed Update Note Cards are automatically set to OUS status during an update and...

Page 92: ...e FTP Server Address and File Name 3 Click Execute Note This utility is not available when the PBX is connected to the Maintenance Console via a LAN connection Ports cannot be selected All registered ports that are in OUS status will be activated and then reset when the update is complete To display the version and file type of the file stored on the FTP server click Load FTP server passwords and ...

Page 93: ...he list of these commands is as follows Card status change INS OUS Diagnosis commands Card installation Card deletion Remote reset LPR programme download requests ISDN automatic setup requests BRI card Signalling Bit Monitor requests T1 E1 Line trace start requests T1 E1 ISDN QSIG Protocol Data Trace start requests Time setting CS programme download requests File deletion When a function other tha...

Page 94: ...re to run the IPCMPR board of the PBX PMMPR_S Backup PBX programme file KX TDE600 File Name Description DGSYS Main system data file Contains all of the current configuration data for the PBX DGSYS_S Backup main system data file PGMPR PBX programme file Contains the software to run the IPCEMPR board of the PBX PGMPR_S Backup PBX programme file When new DBSYS DMSYS DGSYS and PBMPR PMMPR PGMPR files ...

Page 95: ... the corresponding options are not available 4 Click OK A confirmation screen will be displayed 5 Select an option Click OK to reset the PBX If OK is clicked a final confirmation screen will be displayed Click Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files 6 Click OK to reset the PBX or Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files If the reset command was not carried out co...

Page 96: ...fied Is the baud rate correct The default setting and a safe rate is 19 200 bps Is the password correct Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via USB A Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the KX DT300 series KX T7600 series DPT with a USB Module Is the USB driver on the PC running To con...

Page 97: ...sfer PC to PBX SD Card Maintenance Console Software Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards A From 3 1 1 1 Slot click Summary Summary information including software versions is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too narrow A Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setti...

Page 98: ...tation within transmission range of the CS Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations so use the Forced De registration option to delete the previous registration Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station A First de register the Portable Station itself and then delete the extension numb...

Page 99: ...us and then back to INS status Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3 digit numbers to 4 digit numbers A Perform the following steps 1 Open the 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main screen 2 Enter a 2 digit number in Leading Number or change No of Additional Digits from x to xx For more details see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan in Numbering Q How do I set a 3 digit numb...

Page 100: ...sibly overlap with another Leading Number So for example if 2 is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set 21 as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension numbers The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by A feature number Another extension block A Dial setting see 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Quick Dialling see 4 10 2 6 2 Numbe...

Page 101: ... An extension A Dial setting see 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Quick Dialling see 4 10 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial In any of these cases choose another number Q I cannot change a feature number on the B NA DND Call Feature screen A The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature Please choose a different number Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assi...

Page 102: ...e PBX s battery backup memory Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log including Last Number Redial Message Waiting SMDR Advice of Charge AOC Pay Tone Hospitality guest billing data ICD Group monitor log for supervisor PBX date and time Timed Reminder LPR Timed Update time PT handset headset volume PT SP PHONE volume PT ring volume PT display contrast ICD Group login status All extensions are set to Lo...

Page 103: ...ort Type of the port you want to use to either QSIG Slave or QSIG Master Q How do I change the type of an extension port A Set the port to OUS status Then change DPT Type Type in the 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port window Q I have set the type of an extension port to DSS Console but I cannot apply this setting Error E000402 A The number entered in DPT Type Location No on the 3 24 1 1 Sl...

Page 104: ... extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls set all trunk groups for that COS to Block blue Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs A It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the SLT SLT Hold Mode option on the 4 18 2 9 System Options screen For more details see 1 13 1 Call Hold of the Feature Guide Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Dis...

Page 105: ... to add in a blank cell of the Extension Number column 3 Set Delayed Ring as necessary 4 Click Apply Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance Q I cannot set system speed dialling numbers from PC Console A Set the COS of the extension to which PC Console is connected to Manager class by setting Manager on the Manager tab of the 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service CO...

Page 106: ...106 PC Programming Manual 2 7 1 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ ...

Page 107: ...Section 3 1 Configuration PC Programming Manual 107 ...

Page 108: ... image for virtual slots Select Shelf will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Click Select Shelf To install a new shelf to the PBX KX TDE600 only 1 Move the mouse pointer over the first greyed PBX image at the bottom of the screen Pre Install will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Click Pre Install 3 Click Yes to confirm To select a different shelf of the PBX KX TDE600 only 1 Move the mouse point...

Page 109: ...Card Setup screen will be displayed See 3 60 1 1 Slot OPB3 Option Card Setup To access IP PT port properties 1 Click the IP Phone Registration button Supported Card Types KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming IPCMPR IP Convergence Main Processing Card 1 fixed 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 DHLC4 4 Port Digi...

Page 110: ...X NCP500 4 KX NCP1000 4 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension V IPGW16 Virtual 16 Channel VoIP Gateway Card KX NCP500 2 KX NCP1000 2 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway V IPCS4 Virtual 4 IP Cell Station Interface Card KX NCP500 4 KX NCP1000 4 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS For more information on the IPCMPR card virtual cards and other optional cards see the follow...

Page 111: ...LCOT4 4 Port Analogue Trunk Card KX TDE100 6 KX TDE200 8 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type LCOT8 8 Port Analogue Trunk Card LCOT16 16 Port Analogue Trunk Card DID8 8 Port DID Card KX TDE100 6 KX TDE200 8 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type KX TDE series only BRI4 4 Port BRI Card KX TDE100 6 KX TDE200 8 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type BRI8 8 Port BRI Card PRI23 PRI Card 23B channe...

Page 112: ... TDE100 KX TDE200 Installation Manual 1 2 1 Optional Equipment 3 3 1 IPCMPR Card 3 4 1 Virtual Cards KX TDE600 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming IPCEMPR IP Convergence Main Processing Card 1 fixed in Slot 11 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 DHLC8 8 Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card 40 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Ty...

Page 113: ...Card 40 3 52 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway KX TDE series only IP GW16 16 Channel VoIP Gateway Card OPB3 Optional 3 Slot Base Card 16 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property EECHO16 16 Channel Echo Canceller Card 8 None V IPEXT32 Virtual 32 Channel VoIP Extension Card 4 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension V SIPEXT32 Virtual 32 Channel SIP Extension Card 4 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtu...

Page 114: ...rentheses after the name Value Range Card Type for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 DHLC4 4 Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8 8 Port Digital Extension Card DLC16 16 Port Digital Extension Card SLC8 8 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card SLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card LCOT4 4 Port Analogue Trunk Card BRI2 2 Port BRI Card PRI23 PRI Card PRI30 PRI Card T1 T 1 Trunk Card E1 E 1 Trun...

Page 115: ...Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card SLC8 8 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card ESLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card CSLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID ECSLC24 24 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID CSI F 4 or 8 Cell Station Interface Card ELCOT16 16 Port Analogue Trunk Card BRI8 8 Port BRI Card BRI4 4 Port...

Page 116: ...is always displayed as Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Pre Install A card has been added to the slot Idle No card is installed in the slot Maintenance Console Location 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None Version Indicates the LPR version of the instal...

Page 117: ...cation 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None Slot Type Indicates the slot type reference only Value Range Trunk Extension Maintenance Console Location 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the type of virtual VoIP card installed in each slot of the virtual shelf refer...

Page 118: ... 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Feature Guide References None Status Indicates the card status reference only Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Pre Install A card has been added to the slot Idle No card is insta...

Page 119: ...phones can be used IPCMPR ID for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR ID for KX TDE600 Indicates the ID number of the MPR card reference only Value Range ID number of the MPR card Maintenance Console Location 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Activated Feature Indicates the type of activation keys reference only Note that the t...

Page 120: ...one ch 32 Maintenance Console Location 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None The number of activated feature by Activation Key File in SD Card Indicates the number of channels or CA users provided by activation key files on the SD memory card reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key Pro...

Page 121: ...s provided by the DSP card and activation key files on the SD memory card reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 121 3 3 1 1 Slot Activation Key ...

Page 122: ...al References None Feature Guide References 2 4 5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Assignment MAC Address for IPCMPR Card for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 MAC Address for IPCEMPR Card for KX TDE600 Indicates the MAC address of the MPR card reference only Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 ...

Page 123: ...e References None MAC Address for VoIP DSP Indicates the MAC address of the DSP card reference only Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IP Address for VoIP DSP Specifies the IP address of the D...

Page 124: ... Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled Value Range 0 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot C...

Page 125: ...References None Feature Guide References None Speed Duplex for Maintenance Port Specifies the connection mode of the maintenance port The connection is made in 100Mbps half duplex when Auto Negotiation fails Value Range Auto Negotiation 100Mbps full duplex 100Mbps half duplex 10Mbps full duplex 10Mbps half duplex Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP10...

Page 126: ... 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Assignment DHCP Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server Value Range 1 30 s Mainte...

Page 127: ...or KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Card Status Indicates whether the DSP card is enabled for use reference only Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References N...

Page 128: ...ount of BGM Specifies how many IP PTs connected to the MPR card can send out BGM Value Range When using the built in ESVM card 0 113 When not using the built in ESVM card 0 117 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References 3 6 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Feature Guide Refe...

Page 129: ...R for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Compensation Operation for G 711 FAX Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for fax communications using the G 711 codec Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200...

Page 130: ...er for voice communications Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Max for Voice Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location...

Page 131: ...None Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications Value Range 1000 65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Min for FAX Specifies th...

Page 132: ...1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Init for FAX Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for fax communications Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR...

Page 133: ... References None DTMF Detection Level for G 711A Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G 711A codec Value Range 45 12 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Detection Level for G 711µ Specifies the level of DTMF detection for th...

Page 134: ...NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 2 OFF Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected Value Range 20 5000 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX T...

Page 135: ...required for the CED called station identification signal to be detected by the PBX Value Range 50 n n 1 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T38 FAX Transmit Level Network to PBX A Law Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signal...

Page 136: ...CMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP CODEC G 711 only SIP extension Specifies whether or not to only use the G 711 codec for SIP extension calls Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX T...

Page 137: ...he priority 1 codec set for the following types of calls IP extension calls SIP trunk calls Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Feature Guide References None P...

Page 138: ...DE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CTI Port Number Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN Selecting 0 disables the 3rd Party CTI feature Value Range 0 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None F...

Page 139: ...n Assistant Feature Guide References 1 32 3 CA Communication Assistant LAN Status LINK for Main Port Indicates the current connection status of the main port reference only Value Range Disconnect Connect Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None L...

Page 140: ...for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Assignment IP Address for IPCMPR Card for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IP Address for IPCEMPR Card for KX TDE600 Indicates the IP address of the MPR card reference only Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR...

Page 141: ...net mask address of the MPR card reference only Value Range 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Default Gateway Indicates the IP address of the default gateway for the network refere...

Page 142: ...ware version of the IPCMEC card when it is mounted on the MPR card reference only Value Range None Not mounted 2 Standard IPCMEC card 3 Optional IPCMEC card 6M Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 8 Software Upgrading 142 PC Programming Manual...

Page 143: ...ove the mouse pointer over the MPR card and click SVM Property Slot Indicates the slot type reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sub Slot Indicates the sub slot number reference only Value Range Sub slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Proper...

Page 144: ...reen to select the card command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range For sub slot 1 2 Not applicable For sub slot 3 INS Built in ESVM card is activated OUS Built in ESVM card is not activated Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References 3 6 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command...

Page 145: ... The card is activated OUS The card is not activated Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SVM Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature as an MSG card OGM feature or both Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 146: ... an MSG card OGM feature It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature as an MSG card OGM feature or both Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property MSG Feature Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 146 PC Programming Manu...

Page 147: ...on 3 6 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the feature out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 6 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 147 3 6 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command ...

Page 148: ...erences None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 7 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desire...

Page 149: ...e Guide References None Call Distribution Port Group Specifies a call distribution port group to which incoming trunk calls are directed through the virtual VoIP gateway port Value Range 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 3 7 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 2 3 Call Distribution Port Group PC Programming Manual 149 3 7 ...

Page 150: ...mand Programming Manual References 3 7 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 8 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 7 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Gateway Port Feature Guide References None 150 PC Progra...

Page 151: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Call Signalling Model Specifies whether to carry out a call control H 225 process directly between the cards or through a gatekeeper Value Range Direct GateKeeper Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interv...

Page 152: ... Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Primary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the primary gatekeeper Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 152 PC Program...

Page 153: ...port number of the secondary gatekeeper Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None H 225 Port Number Specifies the port number for the H 225 protocol call control in an H 323 protocol suite Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gate...

Page 154: ...es the TCP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None QSIG Connectionless Tunneling UDP Port Number Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunnelling between gateway...

Page 155: ...1 65000 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References Non...

Page 156: ...cifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS field of the packet Value Range ToS DSCP HEX Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None RTP QoS ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field Value Range 0 7 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Progra...

Page 157: ...ences None RTP QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None RTP QoS HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number Value Range 00 FF Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP...

Page 158: ...References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value R...

Page 159: ...y Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprie...

Page 160: ...estination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network When using the Centralised VM feature set this to No Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk Value Range Public Private VPN Maintenance ...

Page 161: ...PBX sends dialled digits one at a time Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Overlap First digit Timer T302 1 Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP trunk Value Range 5 30 s ...

Page 162: ...ange 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Incoming Call Voice Activity Detection for G 711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G 711 codec This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being ...

Page 163: ...helf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Codec Priority 2nd Specifies the second highest priority codec type Value Range None G 711A G 711µ G 729A Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Codec Priority 3rd Specifies the third high...

Page 164: ... ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time for G 711µ Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Value Range 10 ms 20 ms 30 ms 40 m...

Page 165: ... FAX Detection Ability feature Since fax signals using a codec other than G 711 cannot be received accurately at the destination this feature automatically switches the codec to G 711 to enable end to end fax signal relay over the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property ...

Page 166: ...C2833 Value Range 96 127 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 272 512 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Ref...

Page 167: ...pecifies the redundancy count for T 30 messages when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 0 7 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T 38 protocol Value Range 0 3 Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot...

Page 168: ... Guide References None Timer T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call Value Range 0 18000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call Applies to overlap receiving Value Range ...

Page 169: ...enance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to overlap sending Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 170: ...eply after receiving the Release message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link before disconnecting the call Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf P...

Page 171: ...None Feature Guide References None T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message Value...

Page 172: ...nance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 17...

Page 173: ...e PBX tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T3D9 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtua...

Page 174: ...Feature Guide References None 174 PC Programming Manual 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway ...

Page 175: ... 3 10 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GK Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Device Name Specifies the name of the device for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GK Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manu...

Page 176: ...elf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW Group Specifies the numbe...

Page 177: ... Enable TDA Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Protocol Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless tunnelling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network Value Range TCP UDP Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW...

Page 178: ...ure Guide References None Option 1 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IP Codec Priority 1st 2nd 3rd Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used For fax communic...

Page 179: ...d sound Value Range 10 ms 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time G 711Mu Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted so...

Page 180: ...ide References None Option 2 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Activity Detection for G 711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G...

Page 181: ...to end fax signal relay over the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Option 1 IP Codec Priority 1st 2nd 3rd Feature Guide References None DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF tones Value Range Inband Outband RFC2833...

Page 182: ...arameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband RFC2833 Value Range 96 127 Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 182 PC Programming Manual 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings ...

Page 183: ...IP Gateway DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Remaining Number of Digits Specifies the number of digits to be dialled following the leading number to access the destination Value Range 0 29 Maintenance Console Location 3 12 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW No GW Group Selection S...

Page 184: ...e Console Location 3 12 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW No Specifies the number of the destination gateway device This setting is only available when GW No GW Group Selection on this screen is set to GW No Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location 3 12 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway DN2IP Programm...

Page 185: ...tion 3 13 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Hunt Pattern Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Call Distribution Port Group 1st 16th Specifies the number of the call distribution port group to which incoming calls are directed in priority Value Range For 1st CDPG1 CDPG16 For 2nd 16th None CDPG1 CDPG16 Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Vir...

Page 186: ...ver Specifies the UDP port used by the V IPEXT card to transmit and receive MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual Refer...

Page 187: ...ayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1024 65024 Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Voice RTP UDP Port No IP PT Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP Realtime Transfer Protocol data on the IP PT side This must...

Page 188: ...purposes and IP PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 I...

Page 189: ...al IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT First Resending Time MGCP Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 500 n n 1 8 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1...

Page 190: ...References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time Value Range OFF 48 ms 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Valu...

Page 191: ... Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Ran...

Page 192: ...tion 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT 192 PC Programming Manual 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension ...

Page 193: ...ue box will show Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialogue box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the IP PT is successfully registered the status of the IP PT will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the IP PT 1 Click De registration A dialogue box will appear Registered extension numbers and names are displayed...

Page 194: ...e Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Tele...

Page 195: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port...

Page 196: ...ry Telephone IP PT IP Phone Registration ID MAC Address Specifies the MAC address of the IP PT This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT ...

Page 197: ...reference only Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Option Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual Refere...

Page 198: ...ension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 ...

Page 199: ...rvice Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Headset OFF ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP PT Value Range Headset OFF Headset ON Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtua...

Page 200: ...the value set here as follows When G 722 is selected the priority is G 722 G 711 G 729A When G 711 is selected the priority is G 711 G 729A G 722 is unavailable When G 729A is selected both G 711 and G 722 are unavailable Value Range G 711 G 729A G 722 Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP...

Page 201: ...rval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 201 3 15 1 1 Slot Port P...

Page 202: ...Command Programming Manual References 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension Feature Guide References None 202 PC Programmi...

Page 203: ...n Hold Time Max Specifies the maximum length of time that the PBX holds information on the location of SIP Extensions To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 10 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol...

Page 204: ... 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension SIP Session Timer Min Specifies the minimum length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting SIP sessions when no communication is detected To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 90 3...

Page 205: ...gital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual...

Page 206: ... Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 3 17 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension 206 PC Programmin...

Page 207: ...gramming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Extension Number Specifies the ...

Page 208: ... z A Z Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column...

Page 209: ...en Automatic is selected the bearer mode is set to Speech automatically Value Range Automatic Speech Audio Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Packet Sampling Time G 711 G 722 Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound d...

Page 210: ...rty Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Voice Activity Detection for G 711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G 711 codec This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network Valu...

Page 211: ...during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension PC Programming Manual 211 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port ...

Page 212: ...t Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension OUS Takes the port out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 18 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual SIP Extension Port Feature Guide References 1 31 2 SI...

Page 213: ...ver Specifies the UDP port used by the V IPCS card to transmit and receive MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References Non...

Page 214: ...splayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 1024 65024 Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice RTP UDP Port No IP CS Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP Realtime Transfer Protocol data on the IP CS side This must be changed if another network applica...

Page 215: ...bugging purposes and IP CSs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Fir...

Page 216: ...1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None First Resending Time MGCP Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Value Range 500 n n 1 8 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card ...

Page 217: ...ing Manual References None Feature Guide References None Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time Value Range OFF 48 ms 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Conso...

Page 218: ...anual References None Feature Guide References None EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong 218 PC Programming Manu...

Page 219: ...Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 219 3 20 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IPCS ...

Page 220: ...Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialogue box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the IP CS is successfully registered the status of the IP CS will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the IP CS 1 Click De registration A dialogue box will appear Registered IP CSs are displayed on the left 2 Highlight IP CSs and cl...

Page 221: ...ot number Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port Value Ra...

Page 222: ...en click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Indicates whether a certain IP CS is registered reference only Value Range None Registered Maintenance Console Locatio...

Page 223: ... Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP CS reference only Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Program Ver Indicates the programme software file version of the IP CS reference only Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Por...

Page 224: ...l IPCS Programming Manual References 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None Option Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only 224 PC Programming Manual 3 21 1 1 Slot Por...

Page 225: ...rences None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance...

Page 226: ...between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Value Range 10 ms 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time G 729A Specifies the time interval between measurements sam...

Page 227: ... of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G 711 codec This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 227 3 21 1...

Page 228: ...ion Command Programming Manual References 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 21 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IPCS Feature Guide References None 228 PC Programming Manual 3 22 1 1 S...

Page 229: ...erty Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area Value Range Normal Sweden New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Off Hook Time Specifies the minimum length that...

Page 230: ...ue Range 8 n n 12 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Gui...

Page 231: ...e Range Disable The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold Enable The PBX places the call on consultation hold Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 3 Call Splitting Flash Timing Min Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it ...

Page 232: ...Feature Guide References None DTMF R STD Detection Time Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as a DTMF tone Value Range 2 n n 1 31 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Power Supply KX TDE series only Selects the voltage that enables an SLT to activ...

Page 233: ...th SLC8 cards Value Range None Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Installation Manual References For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 None For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 3 6 6 EXT CID Card KX TDA0168 For KX TDE600 3 8 6 EXT CID Card KX TDA0168 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None APT SLT Parallel Ring Enables an SLT connected in parallel to a...

Page 234: ... 0 4 0 mA Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Hook Threshold PD µ law KX TDE600 only Specifies the current threshold µ law for switching from Power Save mode to an active state Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information This setting is only available when an ECSLC24 card is...

Page 235: ...lf number Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port or channel number re...

Page 236: ...PEXT Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration Telephone Type Indicates the connected telephone type reference only The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View Value Range DPT 40V DPT is connected APT 15V APT is connected...

Page 237: ...and Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the PBX Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Value Range Max 5 digit...

Page 238: ...nt extension numbers This is called XDP Mode Off XDP disabled The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone s extension number This is called Parallel Mode Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration Parallel Telephone Ringing S...

Page 239: ...l SDN buttons customised for that device will be deleted When you attempt to apply the new settings a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port click Cancel Value Range Normal For connecting a DPT or CS DSS For connecting a DSS Console A maximum of 8 with the KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE...

Page 240: ...will be deleted If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port click Cancel Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 Location number for DSS Console 1 64 Location number for PC Console 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration...

Page 241: ...No Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the CS This setting is only available when DPT Type Type on this screen is set to Normal Value Range None 1 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None Headset OFF ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT This setting is o...

Page 242: ...reen is set to DPT DPT S DPT S Hybrid S Hybrid SLT or S Hybrid S DPT This setting is not available for the KX T7200 the KX T7451 APTs or SLTs Value Range A 64 ms 697 Hz 64 ms 852 Hz B 32 ms 697 Hz 32 ms 852 Hz C 128 ms 697 Hz 128 ms 852 Hz D 32 ms 697 Hz 96 ms 852 Hz Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References ...

Page 243: ...4 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide Referenc...

Page 244: ... Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Total Count Indicates the total number of each type of telephone and CS connected to the PBX reference only CSs are counted on the basis of the number of ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 26 1 ...

Page 245: ...Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference onl...

Page 246: ...tion CS is in service OUS The CS is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the CS Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Connection Command KX TDE series only Feature Guide References None CS Name Specifies the name of the CSIF port Value Range Max 20 characters Mai...

Page 247: ...r to the CS Value Range None 1 Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 247 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDE series only ...

Page 248: ... Port Property CSI F Port KX TDE series only Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the CS out of service This enables a temporary non use of the CS for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Connection Command KX TDE series only Programming Manual References 3 27 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDE ser...

Page 249: ... seizing a trunk before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 0 5 n n 1 16 s Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on ...

Page 250: ...intenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bell Detection Bell Off Detection Timer Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone company for the length of time specified here the PBX treats the call as lost Value Range 1 0 s 15 0 s Maintenance Console...

Page 251: ...the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Low Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for a low speed pulse dial This is the ratio between the brea...

Page 252: ...t Feature Guide References None Low Speed Pulse Dial Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a low speed pulse dial Low Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Value Range 4 n n 3 15 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature...

Page 253: ...e 4 n n 4 18 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References None High Speed Pulse Dial Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial High Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Value Range 4 n ...

Page 254: ...hat is installed on the LCOT card reference only Value Range None Caller ID Card Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Caller ID Detection Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Signalling Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company Value Range FSK FS...

Page 255: ... 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Carrier Detection Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID To enable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FS...

Page 256: ...able Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Detection Start Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information after receiving a call To enable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to...

Page 257: ...ferences 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Start Code 1 and Start Code 2 Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code 2 Value Range None A B C D Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Information Sta...

Page 258: ...rty LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Information Code PRIVATE OUT OF AREA TECHNICAL REASON UNKNOWN NUMBER RESTRICTED NUMBER Specifies the number used to identify each type of information code Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manu...

Page 259: ...e frequency of the pay tone appropriate to your telephone company Value Range 12kHz 16kHz Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone Pay Tone Gain Specifies the signal strength of the pay tone Value Range 0 31 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type P...

Page 260: ...nces 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone Pay Tone Pulse MAX Specifies the maximum length that a received pay tone signal can be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone signal Value Range None 8 n n 1 250 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone Pay Tone Pulse Interval Spe...

Page 261: ...ne Sending Flash while end talk Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services PC Programming Manual 261 3 29 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type ...

Page 262: ...sole Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number 262 PC Prog...

Page 263: ...mn and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Busy Out Status Indicates the Busy Out status reference only Value Range Normal Busy Out Maintenance Console Location 3 30...

Page 264: ...equired by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line When None is selected here the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected Value Range None 6 5 ms 8 n n 1 112 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CP...

Page 265: ... Manual References None Feature Guide References None Reverse Detection Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected Value Range Disable For no trunk call Outgoing For outgoing trunk calls only Both Call For both outgoing and incoming trunk calls Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References Non...

Page 266: ...tection Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO...

Page 267: ...ort Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 268: ...3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 30 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References None 268 PC ...

Page 269: ...eature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T202 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as a TIE line Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave ...

Page 270: ...Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call Applies to overlap receiving Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References Non...

Page 271: ...mum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to overlap sending Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC disconnection message to ISDN Valu...

Page 272: ...References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link before disconnecting the call Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX ...

Page 273: ...lue Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programm...

Page 274: ...ecifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message Value Rang...

Page 275: ...ure Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after se...

Page 276: ...0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Reference...

Page 277: ...ween each digit on an incoming call Applies to overlap receiving Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP call setting message to ISDN Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Co...

Page 278: ... ISDN Extension T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC disconnection message to ISDN Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC d...

Page 279: ...0 6000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual Ref...

Page 280: ...ISDN Extension T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T312 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP c...

Page 281: ... 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T320 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ...

Page 282: ... that the PBX tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Card ...

Page 283: ...Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 283 3 32 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type ...

Page 284: ...e Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number 284 PC Program...

Page 285: ...Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 30 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port comma...

Page 286: ...ing Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network Value Range No Transmission Status Message is not sent When Mandatory error detection Send the Status Message when an error Mandatory is detected When Option Mandatory error detection Send the Status Message when an error Option or Mandatory is detected Maintenance Co...

Page 287: ...ogramming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position refere...

Page 288: ...n in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private...

Page 289: ...erty BRI Port Programming Manual References 3 34 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line I...

Page 290: ...er digit timer expires Overlap The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Int...

Page 291: ...to P MP Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG Slave or QSIG Master A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned ...

Page 292: ...ual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property ...

Page 293: ...te network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Va...

Page 294: ...ng with 0 or 00 This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension Value Range Ring All Extension for MSN Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN Ring an Extension for MSN Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Refer...

Page 295: ...y Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 295 3 33 1 1 Slot...

Page 296: ...assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This col...

Page 297: ...ds 6 SwissNET2 7 SwissNET3 8 Euro ISDN Standard 14 France Domestic 19 Finland 20 Norway 27 Australia 51 US National ISDN 2 Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY L1 Mode Selects the active mode of L1 Layer 1 on the BRI port Value Range Call Permanent Main...

Page 298: ...1 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Access Mode Selects the configuration of the BRI port Value Range P P Point to Point P MP Point to multipoint Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY TEI Mode Specifies the TEI mode assigned to the BRI...

Page 299: ...f position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming ...

Page 300: ...assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This col...

Page 301: ...work Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Calling Party number Numbering Plan ID Public Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National St...

Page 302: ... the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party number Type of Number Public Private Selects the type of number that applies to incoming tru...

Page 303: ...3 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only PC Programming Manual 303 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Propert...

Page 304: ...n For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command...

Page 305: ...RI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation...

Page 306: ...nce only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None 306 PC Programming Manual 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ...

Page 307: ...ce Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is...

Page 308: ...y BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS CCBS Delete Digits Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of call Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console...

Page 309: ...3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 34 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References None PC Prog...

Page 310: ...ot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number 310 PC Programming Manual 3 35 1 1 S...

Page 311: ...to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 30 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open ...

Page 312: ...detection Option Mandatory Send the Status Message when an error Option or Mandatory is detected Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call Value Range Ignore Ignore the Status Mes...

Page 313: ...nual References None Feature Guide References None Line Coding Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM Pulse Code Modulation for the port This setting is only available when using the PRI23 card Value Range B8ZS AMI Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence...

Page 314: ...0 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None 314 PC Programming M...

Page 315: ...ave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot...

Page 316: ...nual References 3 36 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation C...

Page 317: ...The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Networ...

Page 318: ...tion 11 9 Private Network Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Loopback Test started by Network Enables a loopback test started from the network side to be performed on the PRI23 card Note The version of the PRI23 card must be 2 000 or later Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References ...

Page 319: ...dicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None PC Programming Manual 319 3 35 1 ...

Page 320: ...master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in se...

Page 321: ...MSN Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Network Configuration Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sl...

Page 322: ... Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For c...

Page 323: ...sole Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References 3 36 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Network Type Selects the network type of the port Value Range 0 56 2 UK Domestic 5 Netherlands 6 SwissNET2 7 SwissNET3 8 Euro ISDN Standard 14 France Domestic 19 Finland 20 Norway 27 Australia 51 US National ISDN 2 Maintenance Consol...

Page 324: ...Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port 324 PC Programming Manual 3 35 1 1 Slot...

Page 325: ...slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column...

Page 326: ...ing Party Number Numbering Plan ID Public Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Calling Party Number Type of Number Public Priva...

Page 327: ...nge Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party Number Type of Number Public Private Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown International National Network Subscrib...

Page 328: ...Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number 328 PC Programming Manual 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI...

Page 329: ...necting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click th...

Page 330: ...g Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG...

Page 331: ...its Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of call Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to ...

Page 332: ...3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 36 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Feature Guide References None 332 PC ...

Page 333: ... Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence used for communications Value Range D4 ESF Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ESF Frame Sequence Selects the values for C bit and D bit To enable this setting Frame Sequence on this screen should be set to ESF Value Range C A D B C ...

Page 334: ...intenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level Receive Equalisation of LIU Value Range Automatic 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB 24 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 334 PC Programming Man...

Page 335: ...its after seizing a DDI DID or TIE line before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Detectio...

Page 336: ...T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Refere...

Page 337: ...the DTMF tone to be received Value Range n 42 0 n 0 31 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for pulse digits This is the ratio between the break on hook signal and make off hook signal in a pulse dial Value Range 60 67 Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot...

Page 338: ...e pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not For outgoing trunk calls a...

Page 339: ...dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 1 5 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None PC Programming Manua...

Page 340: ...REAK Width OPX Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal from an SLT connected to an OPX Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Flash Width OPX Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that the PBX can recogni...

Page 341: ...Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Minimum BREAK Width TIE Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from a TIE line Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References N...

Page 342: ... Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenan...

Page 343: ...D End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual 343 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type ...

Page 344: ...Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CH Indicates the channel number reference only Value Range Channel number 344 PC Program...

Page 345: ...click Command Value Range INS The channel is in service OUS The channel is out of service Fault The channel is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance C...

Page 346: ...ts the channel type Value Range Undefined Not assigned GCOT Ground Start Central Office LCOT Loop Start Central Office DDI DID Direct Dialling In Direct Inward Dialling TIE TIE Line OPX Off Premise Extension Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 23 1 T1 Line Service Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of...

Page 347: ...s only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI DID Value Range None 80 n n 2 75 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection CPC Signal Detection LCO GCO Outgoing Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on ou...

Page 348: ... None CO Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel Value Range 10 pulse s 20 pulse s Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk If a wink ...

Page 349: ...r expires Wink Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when the channel type is TIE Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Por...

Page 350: ... to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI DID Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension ma...

Page 351: ...ual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 ...

Page 352: ...the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 352 PC Programming Manual 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port ...

Page 353: ...s 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the channel out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 39 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Feature Guide References None PC Pr...

Page 354: ...ole Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence for the E1 card Value Range PCM30 PCM30 CRC Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Option Selects the value for C bit and D bit Value Range...

Page 355: ...he dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Detection Timer Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n...

Page 356: ...ting level Transmit Pulse Amplitude of LIU reference only Value Range Mode 1 Mode 8 Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level Receive Equalisation of LIU Value Range Automatic 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB 24 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type P...

Page 357: ...MF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for pulse digits This is the ratio between the break on hook signal and make off hook signal in a pulse dial Value Range 60 6...

Page 358: ... Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual Reference...

Page 359: ...l References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial Value ...

Page 360: ... Guide References None Flash Minimum BREAK Width Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from an E1 line Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Flash Width Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an E1 line that the PBX can reco...

Page 361: ...es Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None P...

Page 362: ... the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID 362 PC Programming Manual 3 40 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type ...

Page 363: ...Inter digit Timer Specifies the pseudo answer time This setting is available only when Option 1 or Option 3 is selected in DR2 Setting Type on this screen Value Range 3 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bit Position for Dial Pulse Selects the position of the pulse dial control bit...

Page 364: ... B bit Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Forced Release Enables the PBX to send a forced release signal Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 364...

Page 365: ...l Value Range Type 1 A bit 0 Type 2 A bit 1 Type 3 B bit 0 Type 4 B bit 1 Type 5 A bit 1 B bit 1 Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal Value Range 32 n n 4 9 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line S...

Page 366: ...Length Answer Specifies the length of an answer signal Value Range 150 ms 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None E M P Pulse Length Clear Specifies the length of a clear signal Value Range 150 ms 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Se...

Page 367: ...Specifies the mode for call charge meter pulses Value Range No Detection Meter pulses are not sent or received Outgoing call only Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls Both calls Sends and receives call charge meter pulses Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Meter Pu...

Page 368: ...ulse Value Range 8 n n 1 80 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment DTMF Transmit Specifies the output power of the DTMF signal sent from the DSP Digital Signal Processor Value Range 12 dB 3 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Sig...

Page 369: ...nces None DSP Gain Adjustment MFC R2 Transmit Specifies the output power of MFC R2 signals sent from the DSP Value Range 31 dB 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment MFC R2 Receive Specifies the strength range within which an MFC R2 signal must be for the DSP to r...

Page 370: ...gramming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Error Detection Error Rate Specifies the number of frame errors per second which the PBX needs to recognise a remote alarm To enable this setting Frame Error Detection Error Detection on this screen should be set to Yes Value Range No limit 16 n n 1 7 errors s Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line S...

Page 371: ...ard Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ANI Service ANI Max digits Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received via ANI when receiving a call with ANI Value Range None 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC R2 T...

Page 372: ...le Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC R2 Timer Disappearance Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC R2 disappearance signal sent from the telephone company Value Range 1 30 s Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References...

Page 373: ...es the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number Value Range ANI Complete 1 1 15 ANI Complete 2 4 Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group l Code Assignment ANI Reject Specifies the code used to reject an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1...

Page 374: ...References None Group l Code Assignment End of Digit Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for further signal before detecting the end of digit of an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group ll Code Assignment G ll Code Outgoing Call Specifies ...

Page 375: ...ctively Value Range Undefined Subscriber Operator Collect Call Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group ll Code Assignment Group ll ANI Specifies the Group ll ANI start code Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Man...

Page 376: ...2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC R2 Group 1 E1 MFC R2 Group1 code Specifies the code value of the Group 1 code when the received Group 1 code is Value Range 11 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 376 PC Programming Manual 3 42 1 1 Slot Ca...

Page 377: ...ignment ANI Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment ANI N 1 Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 1 th digit of an ANI number Value ...

Page 378: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment Set up Speech Path Specifies the setup speech path code sent to the telephone company Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment First Request Specifies the code ...

Page 379: ...Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment N 1 Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 1 th digit of an ANI number Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Sett...

Page 380: ...de Assignment N 3 Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 3 th digit of an ANI number Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Idle 1 Specifies the code used normally to inform the telephone company that ...

Page 381: ...nance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Idle 3 Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle when the call is disconnected by the caller Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Pro...

Page 382: ... the telephone company that the received number is not defined Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Congestion Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Con...

Page 383: ...ences None Group B Code Assignment No Billing Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not charged Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Collect Call Reject Specifies the code used to inform the telephone com...

Page 384: ...Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 384 PC Programming Manual 3 43 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 ...

Page 385: ...Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CH Indicates the channel number reference only Value Range channel number PC Programming...

Page 386: ...click Command Value Range INS The channel is in service OUS The channel is out of service Fault The channel is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance C...

Page 387: ...Range Public Use the DIL DDI DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls Private Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 30 1 TIE Line Service CO Dial Mode Se...

Page 388: ...ANI Automatic Number Identification numbers from the E1 line Value Range DTMF Pulse MFC R2 Undefined Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 22 1 E1 Line Service Receive Digits Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI DID number when receiving a call with the DDI DID number Value Range 0 ...

Page 389: ... 75 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E1 channel Value Range 80 ms 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referenc...

Page 390: ...he trunk is released Value Range 64 n n 1 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal Value Range Immediate Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires Wink Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is recei...

Page 391: ...e Receiving Caller ID from TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when Channel Type on this screen is set to E M P or E M C Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network ...

Page 392: ...n 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Wait Timer 60s Selects the length of time that the PBX waits for the called outside party to answer an outgoing trunk call The line will be disconnected automatically when this timer expires Value Range None 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming M...

Page 393: ...ial Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Ma...

Page 394: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 394 PC Programming Manual 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port ...

Page 395: ...3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the channel out of service This enables a temporary non use of the channel for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 45 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Feature Guide References None PC P...

Page 396: ...I DID or TIE line before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Detection T...

Page 397: ...rty EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming M...

Page 398: ...Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area Value Range Normal Sweden New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enou...

Page 399: ...er that the number has been dialled Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX ...

Page 400: ...t hookswitch flash signals Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Minimum Break Width Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series...

Page 401: ...l References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting E M P Pulse Length Seizure Selects the length of a seizure pulse Value Range 150 ms 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting E M P Pulse Length Answer Selects the length of an answer pulse Value Ra...

Page 402: ...on 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting E M P Pulse Length E M P Seizure ACK Enables the PBX to wait for an E M P seizure ACK signal Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References N...

Page 403: ...eginning of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Proper...

Page 404: ... to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID 404 PC Programming Manual 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDE series only ...

Page 405: ... Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CH Indicates the channel number reference only Value Range Channel ...

Page 406: ...ult The channel is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References 3 48 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Connection Command KX TDE series only Feature Guide References None Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the channel Value Range Public Use the DIL method to distribute incoming trunk call...

Page 407: ...DE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Gain Adjustment Indicates the value for hardware adjustment fixed reference only Value Range 1 Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent t...

Page 408: ...ly Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires the trunk is released Value Range 64 n n 1 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only ...

Page 409: ...nces None E M TIE Line Type Selects the type of the voice path for an E M line Value Range 2 wires 4 wires Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private Value Range No Yes...

Page 410: ...ences None Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension ma...

Page 411: ...ual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Gui...

Page 412: ...e the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 412 PC Programming Manual 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only ...

Page 413: ... Property EM Port KX TDE series only Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the channel out of service This enables a temporary non use of the channel for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 48 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Connection Command KX TDE series only Programming Manual References 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series ...

Page 414: ...KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type KX TDE series only Programming Manual Refer...

Page 415: ... 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type KX ...

Page 416: ...TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Minimum MAKE Width Speci...

Page 417: ... 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Caller ID Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller I...

Page 418: ...ramming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID 418 PC Programming Manual 3 49 1 1 Slot Card Property...

Page 419: ...lot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port numb...

Page 420: ...rvice OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References 3 51 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Connection Command KX TDE series only Feature Guide References None Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the DID line Value Range DTMF...

Page 421: ...se dials are sent to the line Value Range 10 pulse s 20 pulse s Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk If a wink signal is not received before this ti...

Page 422: ...ries only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CPC Detection Time Out DID In DID Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line When None is selected here the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected Value Range None 80 n n 2 75 ms Maintenance Console Locati...

Page 423: ...n analogue trunk Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Pro...

Page 424: ...ne Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length...

Page 425: ...ecifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate PC Programming Manual 425 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only ...

Page 426: ...Property DID Port KX TDE series only Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 51 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Connection Command KX TDE series only Programming Manual References 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only...

Page 427: ...nly Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network QSIG CT Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network Value Range...

Page 428: ... No Maintenance Console Location 3 52 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG 428 PC Programming Manual 3 52 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway KX TDE series only ...

Page 429: ...cation 3 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only ...

Page 430: ...n the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References 3 54 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Connection Command KX TDE series only Feature G...

Page 431: ...roperty IP GW Port KX TDE series only Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 54 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Connection Command KX TDE series only Programming Manual References 3 53 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port KX TDE series...

Page 432: ...rences None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask of the card Value Range 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Gateway Address C...

Page 433: ...considers the IP PT to be unreachable and sets the port status to Fault During operation set between 10 s and 60 s Settings over 60 s and Disable are used for debugging purposes and IP PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP ...

Page 434: ...eferences None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain ...

Page 435: ... NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Value Range Disable Weak Maintenance Console Location 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 435 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension KX TDE series only ...

Page 436: ...P PT Voice RTP UDP Port No Server Specifies the UDP port used by the IP EXT card to transmit and receive RTP Realtime Transfer Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port For voice communications an IP EXT card uses 128 contiguous UDP ports starting from the port number specified here Value Range 1024 65472 Maintenance Console Location 3 56 1 1 Slot Car...

Page 437: ...nge 1024 65472 Maintenance Console Location 3 56 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Common Settings KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 437 3 56 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Common Settings KX TDE series only ...

Page 438: ... right arrow to select them for registration Click Next 4 If the registration is still in progress the dialogue box will show Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialogue box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the IP PT is successfully registered the status of the IP PT will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the ...

Page 439: ...tes the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only Programming ...

Page 440: ...ming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port ...

Page 441: ...ide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT IP Address Indicates the IP address of the IP PT reference only Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Headset OFF ON Turns on or off the use of a headset wit...

Page 442: ... ms 697 Hz 96 ms 852 Hz Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT IP Codec Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data Value Range G 711 G 729 Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Po...

Page 443: ...IP Codec on this screen is set to G 711 only 20 ms and 30 ms are available Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 443 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only ...

Page 444: ...600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References N...

Page 445: ...ernal Input Output Card ESVM2 2 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4 4 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Installation Manual References For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 1 2 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 2 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDE600 1 2 1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Refe...

Page 446: ...nual References 3 59 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Feature Guide References None Port Number Indicates the port number of the mounted option card reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Status Indicates the port status of the mounted option card reference on...

Page 447: ...on Time Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the input and makes a sensor call Value Range 32 n n 2 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor Input Signal Detection Reopening Time Specifies the length of time after the senso...

Page 448: ... Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM MSG Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card OGM feature It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature as an MSG card OGM feature or both Value Range Disable E...

Page 449: ...Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM PC Programming Manual 449 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property ...

Page 450: ...rences None Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the card out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 59 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pre INS Assigns the card type to a certain sub slot Pre installation Value Range MSG4 4 Channel Message Card DPH4 4 Port Doorphone Card DPH2 2 Port Doorphone...

Page 451: ... KX NCP1000 1 2 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 2 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDE600 1 2 1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Delete Assigns the card type to be deleted from the sub slot Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 59 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guid...

Page 452: ...mplified Voice Message Card ESVM4 4 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3 60 1 1 Slot OPB3 Option Card Setup Installation Manual References For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 1 2 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 2 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDE600 1 2 1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide R...

Page 453: ... Port Doorphone Card DPH2 2 Port Doorphone Card ECHO16 16 Channel Echo Canceller Card EIO4 4 Port External Input Output Card ESVM2 2 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4 4 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3 60 1 1 Slot OPB3 Option Card Setup Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide References None PC Programm...

Page 454: ...he status of the PS will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the PS 1 Click De registration A dialogue box will appear Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left 2 Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de registration Click Next A dialogue box will appear 3 Click Confirm If the de registration is s...

Page 455: ...onnection Index Indicates the PS number reference only Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 1 64 For KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 128 For KX TDE600 1 512 Maintenance Console Location 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection Extension No Specifies the extension number of the PS In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode the PS can be us...

Page 456: ...ss XDP Parallel Mode Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Programming Manual References 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Name Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered reference only Value Range None Regist...

Page 457: ...Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection PC Programming Manual 457 3 61 1 2 Portable Station ...

Page 458: ... be assigned automatically when a CS is connected to the PBX Without the Radio System ID PSs cannot be registered System Wireless System ID Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 62 1 3 Option Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None New Card Installation Card Status for any Card Selects t...

Page 459: ...e Range ISDN Standard mode The CCBS CF CT and Centralised VM features are supported DIL and DID call distribution are available for the D channel T1 LCOT mode DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels The CCBS CF CT and Centralised VM features are not available in this mode Maintenance Console Location 3 62 1 3 Option Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referenc...

Page 460: ...OUS then INS Note If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network TIE line service QSIG network etc without being connected through the telephone company assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network That PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source All other PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source ...

Page 461: ...Section 4 2 System PC Programming Manual 461 ...

Page 462: ...e and time Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to change and typing the new value or by clicking the up down arrows beside the date and time Value Range Year 2000 2099 Month 01 12 Day 01 31 Hour 00 23 Minute 00 59 Second 00 59 Maintenance Console Location 4 1 2 1 1 Date Time Date Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 462 PC Programming M...

Page 463: ...n provided by the network Value Range Disable ISDN Caller ID FSK SNTP Maintenance Console Location 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup SNTP SNTP Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of an SNTP server Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving P...

Page 464: ...nance Console Location 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup SNTP Time Zone Time Zone for PC Indicates the UTC Coordinated Universal Time time zone of the PC reference only Value Range 14 00 14 00 Maintenance Console Location 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide...

Page 465: ... 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Programming Manual References 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup Start Date Year Month Day Specifies the start date of daylight savings time Value Range Year 2000 2099 Month 1 12 Day 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 4 3 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Programming Manual Re...

Page 466: ...th 1 12 Day 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 4 3 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Programming Manual References 4 2 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup 466 PC Programming Manual 4 3 2 1 2 Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving ...

Page 467: ...ng Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM for KX NCP series Music Source of BGM2 for KX TDE series Selects the audio source of BGM for KX NCP series BGM2 for KX TDE series Value Range For KX NCP series External BGM Interna...

Page 468: ...ferences 1 13 4 Music on Hold 1 17 4 Background Music BGM 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 7 for KX NCP series Music Source of BGM3 8 for KX TDE series Card Selects the card MPR ESVM Circuit or ESVM of the audio source of BGM Cards must have the MSG Feature setting enabled to be available for selection Value Range Available cards Maintenance Console Location 4...

Page 469: ...ramming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on Hold BGM and Music on Hold Sound on Transfer Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold or ringback tone Value Range Same as Music on Hold Ringback Tone Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 ...

Page 470: ...tic Redial Repeat Interval Specifies the length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts Value Range 10 n n 1 360 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic...

Page 471: ...ogue trunk is performed Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start Specifies the length of time between going off hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature is set Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers C...

Page 472: ...nt digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder tone Value Range 1 250 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Dial Analogue CO First Digit Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk If no digit is sent before t...

Page 473: ...alogue trunk Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Analogue CO Call Duration Start Specifies the length of time between the end of dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analogue trunk calls Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual...

Page 474: ... Answer Time Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Recall Hold Recall Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held call remains unretrieved Value Range 0 disable the Hold Recall 240 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 ...

Page 475: ...l hears a Call Park Recall ring Value Range 1 240 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 13 2 Call Park Recall Disconnect after Recall Specifies the length of time after an extension with a trunk call on hold receives a Hold Recall ton...

Page 476: ...usy Line Busy Party Features Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Handset Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Tone Length Reorder Tone ...

Page 477: ...e Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Mute OGM Start Timer after answering Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line Value Range 0 0 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual Referenc...

Page 478: ...pecifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates Value Range 0 5 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Intercept Timer Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the length of time until an unan...

Page 479: ...all rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA CO to CO Call Prolong Counter Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk to trunk call on a DIS...

Page 480: ...tem Access DISA DISA Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM DISA Reorder Tone Durat...

Page 481: ... Programming Manual References 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Call Duration Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected Value Range 10 n n 0 30 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Open Duration Spec...

Page 482: ...ge 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Interval Time Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms Value Range 10 n n 1 120 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder 482 PC Pr...

Page 483: ...Conference Recall tone Value Range 60 n n 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference Unattended Conference Warning Tone Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conferen...

Page 484: ...ces None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference Miscellaneous Caller ID Waiting to receive Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk If the Caller ID is received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which Caller ID Detection is disabled this timer is not applicable Value Range 0 15 s Mainte...

Page 485: ...ler ID Extension PIN Lock Counter Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked A locked extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager Specifying None disables this counter Value Range None 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9...

Page 486: ...ocation 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Incoming Call Inter digit Timer TIE Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialled number from a TIE line The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires Value Range 3 30 s Maintenance Co...

Page 487: ...ongoing call after air synchronisation is lost Value Range 60 n n 0 300 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None Voice Mail Caller from VM to CO On hook Wait Time Specifies the length of time from when the VPS seizes a trunk for example to transfer a call until the VPS goes on hook If the time s...

Page 488: ...al References None Feature Guide References None During Conversation DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS during a conversation Value Range 64 16 n n 0 15 ms Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None During Conversation Pause Signal ...

Page 489: ...y the cell station Value Range 0 s 4 s 8 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 4 18 2 9 System Options System Wireless Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group SVM Recording Time Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature Value Range 1 600 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 ...

Page 490: ...implified Voice Message SVM Conference Group Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a conference group call will ring The conference group call will be established with members who answer within this time If no members answer the call before this timer expires the call is cancelled Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References ...

Page 491: ...ime Table 1 Select the desired Time Table from the Time Table No list When in Automatic Switching mode the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the corresponding Time Table Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension determined by COS To adjust the currently displayed Time Table click and drag the divisions between two time periods To programme the time blocks ...

Page 492: ...rences None Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 1 Day Lunch Night Day1 Start Lunch Start Day2 Start Night Start Hour Minute Specifies the start time for each time block Times can only be set when 1 Day Lunch Night Day1 Start Lunch Start Day2 Start Night Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 4 7 2 4 Week Table Time Setting P...

Page 493: ...3 Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 4 7 2 4 Week Table Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 2 Break Break 1 3 End Hour Minute Specifies the end time for each break period Times can only be set when 2 Break Break 1 3 Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Mai...

Page 494: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 494 PC Programming Manual 4 7 2 4 Week Table Time Setting ...

Page 495: ... Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Holiday Table Start Date Month Specifies the month of the holiday start date Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Holiday Table Start Date...

Page 496: ...ue Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Holiday Table End Date Day Specifies the day of the holiday end date Value Range 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service 496 PC Programming Manual 4 8 2 5 Holida...

Page 497: ...umbers and floating extension numbers Value Range Max 3 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 7...

Page 498: ... Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM 8 6 6 6 Tenant Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features Idle Line Access Local Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call by Idle Line Access selects an idle trunk automatically Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manua...

Page 499: ...pecifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Redial Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialled Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Conso...

Page 500: ... Dial Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Personal Speed Dialling Programming Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal S...

Page 501: ...n Programming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging External BGM On Off Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to turn on or off the external BGM Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service ...

Page 502: ...Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parallel Telephone Ring Mode Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT conn...

Page 503: ...l Pickup Directed Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny Feature ...

Page 504: ...paging group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging Automatic Callback Busy Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbe...

Page 505: ...Remote Operation by Other Extension Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Setting...

Page 506: ...le Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 1 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a Holding Extension Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding extension number Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numberin...

Page 507: ...a Held CO Line Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held trunk call from a different extension by specifying the held trunk number Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 1 Call Hold Door Open Specifies the feature number used to open a door Value Ran...

Page 508: ...nces 1 17 10 External Relay Control External Feature Access Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number used...

Page 509: ...IR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Ident...

Page 510: ...n to the network Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN CO Subscriber Number 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port CO Setting Subscriber Number 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings ISDN CLIP CLIP ID 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings ISDN CLI...

Page 511: ...g Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting or call back the caller Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None ...

Page 512: ...ng Plan Main Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND FWD DND Set Cancel Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD DND for incoming intercom calls Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbe...

Page 513: ...ntercom calls to an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Group FWD Set Cancel...

Page 514: ... 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Call Pickup Deny Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny i e preventing other extensions from picking up call...

Page 515: ...used to use the same extension settings at a new extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 3 Walking Extension Features Data Line Security Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security i e preventing signals from other extensi...

Page 516: ... 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Automatic Call Waiting Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk doorphone or a call via an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Executive Overri...

Page 517: ...ter or leave Not Ready mode Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Log in Log out Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits co...

Page 518: ...mber Feature Guide References 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature Hot Line Pickup Dial Program Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set cancel the Hot Line feature or programme the number to be automatically dialled Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone...

Page 519: ...Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Remote Timed Reminder Remote Wakeup Call Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely Wake up Call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming ...

Page 520: ...s consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Main SMDR for External Hotel Application 2 Printing Message 1 8 Feature Guide References 1 26 2 Printing Message Extension Dial Lock Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain trunk calls and change the forwarding des...

Page 521: ...ager Manager Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to unlock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Man...

Page 522: ...ures of an extension to the default values Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear Extension PIN Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Loca...

Page 523: ...ature number used to make a conference group call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Ring Duration 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Operation 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Feature Guide References 1...

Page 524: ...es 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 5 Busy Out Busy Out for Analogue CO Feature Guide References 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out Simplified Voice Message Access Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record listen to and delete messages Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 6 9 4 1 7 Wire...

Page 525: ... 1 TIE Table Leading Number Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service KX T7710 The settings of the MESSAGE button and One touch buttons on the KX T7710 can be programmed Dial Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the preprogrammed number for each button reference only Value Range B For MESSAGE button A1 For One touch button 1 A2 For One touch button 2 A3 ...

Page 526: ...tenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back Feature Guide References 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling One touch Dial 01 08 Phone Number Specifies the number dialled when a one touch button on the KX T7710 is pressed This is available only when the position of the Mode switch leve...

Page 527: ...hen TIE line does not work Specifies whether to check if the quick dial numbering plan is compatible does not overlap with the main numbering plan Value Range Disable Checks whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan Enable Does not check whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan Maintenance Console Location 4 10 2 6 2 Nu...

Page 528: ...uick Dialling number is used Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 4 10 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 528 PC Programming Manual 4 10 2 6 2 Numbering Pla...

Page 529: ...l C Waiting for Extension Call 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Executive Busy Override Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three party co...

Page 530: ...Message Waiting Set Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Message Waiting Call Monitor Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension s conversation Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or ...

Page 531: ...D Override 2 Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting or call an extension in DND mode This is the same setting as BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override on this screen and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features This can be useful for example if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND Override V...

Page 532: ...1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA 532 PC Programming Manual 4 11 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature ...

Page 533: ...f Service COS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring level for making trunk calls in each time mode Value Range 1 Allows all trunk calls 2 6 Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7 Restricts all trunk calls Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual Re...

Page 534: ...Code Feature Guide References 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock TRS Level for System Speed Dialling Specifies the TRS Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers which overrides the TRS Barring set for the current time mode Value Range 1 Allows all trunk calls 2 6 Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7 Restricts all trunk ...

Page 535: ... CO Duration Time 60s on 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 Extension CO Call Limitation For Incoming Call 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main COS 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extensi...

Page 536: ...1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Account Code Mode Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call Value Range Option Forced Maintenance Console Location...

Page 537: ... 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Outgoing CO Call Printout SMDR Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 13 1 11 1...

Page 538: ...COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup DND Override Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number V...

Page 539: ... Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 8 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Transfer to busy Extension w o BSS Operation Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy Value Range Disable The call is not transferred If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification featu...

Page 540: ...ance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback Executive COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Call Monito...

Page 541: ...Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override Deny Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programmin...

Page 542: ...for the group to which the extension belongs Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Programming Mode Leve...

Page 543: ... Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 2 2 6 Manager Features Time Service Switch Enables manual switching of time modes Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table 6 1 4 ...

Page 544: ...hat happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook Value Range Enhanced DSS The registered owner extension is called Standard SDN A dial tone is heard Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Making call by COS of S...

Page 545: ... buttons on their own extensions using PT programming Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Optional Device Other Extensions COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance...

Page 546: ...ble Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 17 2 Door Open External Relay Access Enables access to external relays Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 7 6 5 4 External Relay Feature Guide References 1 17 10 External Relay Control Accept the Call from DISA Enables reception of calls fro...

Page 547: ...ange Allow Deny Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS Value Range Allow Deny Maintenance ...

Page 548: ...ue Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CA CA ICD Group Log Out Feature Guide References 1 32 3 CA Communication Assistant CA ICD Group Log Out Enables logging out of ICD groups when using Communication Assistant CA Client Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 549: ...f Service COS Conference Group Call Operation Enables making conference group calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Ring Duration 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Conference Group Call Operation 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Feature Guide Ref...

Page 550: ...isable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 550 PC Programming Manual 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings ...

Page 551: ...E100 KX TDE200 or 1 96 for KX TDE600 Specifies the available trunk groups Value Range Block blue Non Block Maintenance Console Location 4 13 2 7 2 Class of Service External Call Block Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access PC...

Page 552: ...ther Extension 1 64 Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked Value Range Block blue Non Block Maintenance Console Location 4 14 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main COS 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Se...

Page 553: ...fies the ring tone pattern for incoming trunk calls Value Range Single Double Triple Option1 Option2 Maintenance Console Location 4 15 2 8 1 Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Trunk Group Number 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Fea...

Page 554: ...the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls Value Range Single Double Triple S Double Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 4 16 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide ...

Page 555: ...all from Others Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None Timed Reminder Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms Value Range Single Double Triple Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 556: ...8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None External Sensor Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor Value Range Single Double Triple Option 1 O...

Page 557: ...Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 557 4 17 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others ...

Page 558: ...splay Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions The time display format assigned here applies when setting the Timed Reminder feature Value Range 12H 24H Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder PT LCD Password PIN Display Selects whether passwords and PINs Personal Identification Number...

Page 559: ... Options Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 20 3 LED Indication PT Fwd DND DND LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD DND button while the DND feature is activated Value Range On Solid Red on Flash Slow red flashing Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 ...

Page 560: ... When there are separate FWD DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from extensions mode switching cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features PT Fwd DND Paging to DND Extension Specifies ...

Page 561: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 2 Off hook Monitor PT Operation Privacy Release by SCO key Selects the function of the S CO button during a trunk call Value Range Enable Pressing the S CO button activates the Privacy Release feature Disable Pressing the S CO button switches the information shown on the PT display Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Progr...

Page 562: ...ation Automatic Answer for Call from CO after Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk Value Range No Ring 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback PT Op...

Page 563: ...all Transfer without Announcement feature Value Range Hold Any extension can retrieve a held call Exclusive Hold Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 1 Call Hold Option 2 Extension Clear Call Waiting Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extensio...

Page 564: ... References None Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear Hot Line Pickup Dial Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed Value Range Clear Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear CODEC System CODEC Sele...

Page 565: ...c mode Specifies whether to automatically send as an end code when dialling to an ISDN line if used as the end code will not be dialled out as part of a number even when the key is pressed Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN CO ISDN Outgoing Call Type 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI ...

Page 566: ...nalogue CO line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Redial Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory Specifies whether ...

Page 567: ...g Call Selects whether the time limit for extension to trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls COS determines the use of this feature and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings ...

Page 568: ... Confirmation Tone Tone 1 Called by Voice Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in voice calling mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 2 Paged Automatic A...

Page 569: ...r from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 3 2 Start Talking after Answering Call Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3 2 Confirmation Tone 3 2 is heard from an extension when answering a call ...

Page 570: ...Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 4 2 Finish Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4 2 Confirmation Tone 4 2 is heard from an extension when a party leaves a conference call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone T...

Page 571: ...e Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 29 1 Dial Tone Dial Tone Dial Tone for Extension Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them Value Range Type A Type B Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature ...

Page 572: ... 8 1 System Setting Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 1 29 1 Dial Tone Echo Cancel Conference Enables the use of the ECHO EECHO card for conference calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference Echo Cancel CO to CO Enables the use of the ECHO EECHO car...

Page 573: ...of the ECHO EECHO card for extension to ISDN T1 E1 line calls If set to Enable the echo canceller card is used for extension to ISDN T1 E1 line calls If set to Disable the echo canceller card is not used for extension to ISDN T1 E1 line calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Option 4 DSS...

Page 574: ...l flash when a call arrives and pressing it will pick up the call Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup DSS Key Call Pick up by DSS key for ICD Group Call Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution group To enable this setting DSS K...

Page 575: ...n Enable The PBX places the current call on consultation hold Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 12 1 Call Transfer Transfer Automatic Answer for Transferred Call Enables transferred calls including direct extension calls to be automatically answered when using the Hands free Answerback feature Value Range Disable Enab...

Page 576: ... PBX 1 and extension 102 is registered at PBX 2 Only the Extension Number Method is supported If disabled different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Leading Number Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Send CLIP of CO Caller when ...

Page 577: ...le Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 30 6 Network ICD Group Send CLIP of Extension Caller when call is forwarded to CO Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling extension or the CLIP number of the fo...

Page 578: ...eature Guide References 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD Selects whether call information such as Caller ID is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS i e a PS with one or more PDN buttons when a call is received while delayed ringing is set Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual Ref...

Page 579: ...e Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Message Waiting Whisper OHCA for SLT APT KX T72xx Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP PTs and DPTs other than KX T7400 series KX T7500 series KX T7600 series or KX DT300 series Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options...

Page 580: ...Out Busy Out for Analogue CO Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected preventing that trunk from being used Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out ISDN Voice Path Connection Connect when Alert is sent from ISDN Enable...

Page 581: ...al BGM Paging Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Option Fwd from ISDN to ISDN Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network This setting should be enabled for networks that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received Value Range Mode1 Disable Mode2 Enable Maintenance Console Location 4...

Page 582: ... of the calling party name when making a call to the ISDN network Value Range Display Facility Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Option 6 CTI Built in Communication Assistant System status retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received for First Party...

Page 583: ...ion with the CTI application software has been lost Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 3rd Party CTI System status retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received for Third Party Call Control CTI Val...

Page 584: ... CTI CDR retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received for Third Party Call Control CTI Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 3rd Party CTI CDR retry counter Specifies the number of times tha...

Page 585: ...s None Feature Guide References None CTI Multi PBX Control USB Serial Number Specifies the serial number assigned to this PBX s USB data transfers used when multiple PBXs are connected via USB to one PC for example for CTI Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CTI Make Call SLT Ring Specifies whether to...

Page 586: ...SDN Key Selects whether to force an extension e g KX NT400 to become idle while having a call held on a PDN SDN button Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension 586 PC Programming Manual 4 18 2 9 System Options ...

Page 587: ...al References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Channel Seizure Signal Bits Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range 10 n n 3 40 bits Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Mark Signal Bits Specifies the number of mark bits to...

Page 588: ... an SLT Value Range 64 n n 5 35 ms Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Signal Type Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT reference only Value Range FSK Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Man...

Page 589: ...r ID Send Caller ID Date Time to Extension Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Name to Extension Enables the PBX to send the caller s name when send...

Page 590: ... Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID FSK Transmission Level Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation Value Range 14 dB 12 dB 10 dB 8 dB 6 dB 4 dB 2 dB 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1...

Page 591: ...Programming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging Paging EPG 2 External Pager 2 KX TDE series only Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 2 Value Range 15 15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 20 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging Paging Paging Level from PT Spe...

Page 592: ...dB Maintenance Console Location 4 20 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on Hold 1 17 4 Background Music BGM MOH MOH 2 Music On Hold 2 KX TDE series only Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 2 Value Range 11 11 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 20 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References...

Page 593: ...e Console Location 4 21 2 11 2 Audio Gain Card Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Down Gain From PBX Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card Value Range 15 15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 21 2 11 2 Audio Gain Card Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 593 4 21 2 11 2 Audio G...

Page 594: ...594 PC Programming Manual 4 21 2 11 2 Audio Gain Card ...

Page 595: ...Section 5 3 Group PC Programming Manual 595 ...

Page 596: ...1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None COS Specifies the COS of the trunk group applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with TIE Line Service If you wish to prevent such calls from being made ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of 7 assigned for all relevant time modes in 4 12 2 7 1 Class of ...

Page 597: ...CO Duration Time 60s Specifies the length of time that a trunk to trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected Value Range None 60 n n 1 60 s Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation Extension CO Duration Time 60s Specifies the length of time that an exten...

Page 598: ...e 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Dialling Plan Table Specifies the table to be used for en bloc dialling Value Range 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 5 4 3 1 4 Dialli...

Page 599: ...unk call by silence detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Tone Detection Continuous Enables the disconnection of a DISA originated trunk to trunk call by continuous signal de...

Page 600: ...m 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Silence Enables the disconnection of an SVM originated trunk to trunk call by silence detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Sim...

Page 601: ... signal detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Host PBX Access Code Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Setti...

Page 602: ...ss Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Collect Call Reject For Brazil Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject for Brazil Mode Enables the PBX to automatic...

Page 603: ...0 ms 2000 ms Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject for Brazil Flashing Time Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call This setting is only for users in Brazil Value Range 1000 ms 1500 ms 2000 ms 2500 ms Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk ...

Page 604: ...unk group assigned to the corresponding priority level Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Trunk Group No 1 64 For KX TDE600 Trunk Group No 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 5 2 3 1 2 Trunk Group Local Access Priority Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Tru...

Page 605: ...ional call data and 1 long distance code can be programmed Each trunk group can select a table for use Select the desired table from the Modification Table list If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here the PBX applies the Long Distance Code settings to the modified number Area Code for Local International Call Data 1 10 Specifies the leading number area code to look for...

Page 606: ...e type of network numbering plan is Unknown or not specified A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed Select the desired table from the Modification Table list If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits for National the caller s number is not modified Minimum Caller ID Digits for International Specifies the minimum numbe...

Page 607: ...dded Number for International Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID Digits for International Value Range Max 8 digits 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Calling Party number Type of Number Public Private 3 35 1 1...

Page 608: ...sed for sending to the network as a CLIP number A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed Select the desired table from the Modification Table list Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller s number for each type of network numbering plan Value Range 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification Progra...

Page 609: ...on Programming Manual References 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Calling Party Number Type of Number Public Private 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Called Party Number Type of Number Public Private Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual 609 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification ...

Page 610: ...st To assign a set of leading numbers automatically click Auto Assign Leading Number Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P 0 1 and X 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Analogue CO First Digit 4 ...

Page 611: ...place of the removed digits Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY PC Programming Manual 611 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan ...

Page 612: ...lling plan table Value Range Type A 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type B 1 N11 2 NNX XXXX 3 1NPX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type C 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NNX XXXX 4 1NPX NXX XXXX 5 50 Not stored Type D 1 47 Not stored 48 N11 49 NXX XXXX 50 1NXX NXX XXXX Type E 1 N11 2 NXX NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Maintenance Console Location 5 5 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Auto Assign Program...

Page 613: ...te Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Rate Specifies the call charge rate The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 5 6 3 1 5 Trunk Group Charge Rate Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Gu...

Page 614: ...ole Location 5 7 3 2 User Group Programming Manual References 5 8 3 3 Call Pickup Group 5 10 3 4 Paging Group 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main User Group 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main User Group Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TD...

Page 615: ...2 2 3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual 615 5 7 3 2 User Group ...

Page 616: ...ng Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 2 2 Group Pickup Group 1st 8th Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen To assign an extension user group to more th...

Page 617: ...Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 2 2 Group PC Programming Manual 617 5 8 3 3 Call Pickup Group ...

Page 618: ...ension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 2 2 Group User Group 1 32 for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or 1 96 for KX TDE600 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 5 9 3 3 Call Pickup Group All Setting Programming Manual Re...

Page 619: ...haracters Maintenance Console Location 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group Paging Group 1st 8th Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 paging groups on th...

Page 620: ...Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group 620 PC Programming Manual 5 10 3 4 Paging Group ...

Page 621: ...xtension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group User Group 1 32 for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or 1 96 for KX TDE600 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group Value Range ON blue OFF white Maintenance Console Location 5 11 3 4 Paging Group All Setting Programming Manual Refe...

Page 622: ...on Settings Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group External Pager 1 Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 5 12 3 4 Paging Group External Pager Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 16...

Page 623: ... External Pager Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group PC Programming Manual 623 5 12 3 4 Paging Group External Pager ...

Page 624: ...ncoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY in the Feature Guide Main Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies th...

Page 625: ... of the incoming call distribution group Value Range All Distribution Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution FWD Mode Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group Value Range No Ring Ring Mainte...

Page 626: ... 2 2 Group Call Distribution Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Setti...

Page 627: ...k 4 14 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block Feature Guide References 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block CLIP on ICD Group Button Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Gu...

Page 628: ...tings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Queuing Busy Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Tabl...

Page 629: ...the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 13 ...

Page 630: ...oup Group Settings Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature Time out Manual Queue Redirection Overflow Time Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination Value Range None 10 n n 1 125 s Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group...

Page 631: ...ing Feature Queuing Time Table Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution gro...

Page 632: ...mming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing Enables the PBX to play messages BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued Value Range Disable Ringback Tone Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Dis...

Page 633: ...haracters Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension No Answer Redirection Time Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member extension of the incoming call distribution group in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution met...

Page 634: ...anual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Maximum No of Busy Extension Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max Call arrives at an idle extension 1 32 Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned number Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 635: ...ble Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 5 VIP Call Supervisor Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group s supervisor The supervisor can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6 line display PT The supe...

Page 636: ...ings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Group Log Group FWD Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature ...

Page 637: ...emory Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log Group FWD Call from CO Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group S...

Page 638: ...Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Group FWD Call from Extension Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the in...

Page 639: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD PC Programming Manual 639 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings ...

Page 640: ...ers to another group click Member list copy select the group and click OK Extension Number Specifies the extension number of each member In addition to the extension numbers of PT SLT PS and T1 OPX extensions floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Se...

Page 641: ...ension can accept another call This timer is used when Options Wrap up Timer based on is set to ICD Group Member in 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Value Range 10 n n 0 300 s Maintenance Console Location 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Programming Manual References 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wra...

Page 642: ...he overflow destination when there is no answer Disconnect Disconnects the line Sequence 01 16 Redirects the call to a different sequence Wait 5 n n 1 16 s If preceded by an OGM plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time if not preceded by an OGM sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time OGM 01 64 Sends a certain OGM Maintenance Console Location 5 15 3 5 2 Incoming Call ...

Page 643: ... Enhanced Phantom button mode When set to Enhanced Phantom mode creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group The extension user can also specify the delayed ringing settings Value Range Group DN Enhanced Phantom Maintenance Console Location 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellan...

Page 644: ...ngs and 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings become unavailable Value Range Extension The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension including a retrieved call on hold ICD Group Member The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group Maintenance Console Location 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Programming Manual Refe...

Page 645: ...members to the group click Member List To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Hunting Group Name Specifies the name of the hunting group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Hunting...

Page 646: ...me mode Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 646 PC Programming Manual 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group ...

Page 647: ...g of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 18 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Member List Programming Manual References 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 18 3 6 Ex...

Page 648: ...ences 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Intercept to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to the VM DPT group by Intercept Routing When the VPS receives the mailbox number the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 19 3 7 1 VM DPT Group Sy...

Page 649: ...answered within a programmed time period 2 when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension When the VPS receives the mailbox number the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 19 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Gu...

Page 650: ...tion 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Programming Manual References 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Group Name Specifies the name of the VM DPT group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DPT group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 20 ...

Page 651: ...ess 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Other PBX Extension Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Group Name Specifies the name of the centralised VM DPT group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DPT group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group...

Page 652: ...sole Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Se...

Page 653: ...r the port reference only Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Extension No Indicates the extension number assigned to the VM port reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Consol...

Page 654: ...nsion Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 654 PC Programming Manual 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Uni...

Page 655: ... the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is ringing Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal Busy Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy Value Range Max 4 digit...

Page 656: ... 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal Answer Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered the call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3...

Page 657: ... Status Signal Disconnect Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal FWD to VM Ringback Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the V...

Page 658: ...e Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal FWD to Extension Ringback Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to another extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Co...

Page 659: ...message waiting notification from the VPS so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without having to dial the mailbox number manually Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 H mailbox number and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Message Waiting VM DTM...

Page 660: ... System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing DTMF Length for VM Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS Value Range 80 ms 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing Inter digit Time Specifies the length of pause time between DTM...

Page 661: ...nce Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the VPS has finished dialling Value Range 0 5 s 1 0 s 1 5 s 2 0 s Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF...

Page 662: ...a mailbox or in the AA service mode It is also possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS Value Range None Answer by Mailbox AA Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Others Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to th...

Page 663: ... Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Programmed Mailbox No 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No Feature Guide References None Others Message Waiting Lamp Control Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature e g turning off the MESSAGE button light when an exte...

Page 664: ...Maintenance Console Location 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Group Name Specifies the name of the VM DTMF group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DTMF group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Manua...

Page 665: ...nsole Location 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration PC Programming Manual 665 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings ...

Page 666: ...e VPS Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 24 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Member List Programming Manual References 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 24 3 8 2 VM D...

Page 667: ... 3 9 PS Ring Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group Group Name Specifies the name of the PS ring group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group Progra...

Page 668: ...nge Caller ID Called Number Maintenance Console Location 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group 668 PC Programming Manual 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group ...

Page 669: ...ber Specifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group Value Range Max 5 digits Maintenance Console Location 5 26 3 9 PS Ring Group Member List Programming Manual References 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters M...

Page 670: ...name of the conference group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Conference Group Call Broadcast Mode Specifies whether only the original caller can speak or up to 8 people can speak at the start of a conference group call Value Range Disable The original caller and up to 7 particip...

Page 671: ... talk feature allows PS users to speak during the call by pressing any of their dial keys Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Programming Manual References 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Broadcast Mode Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Conference Group Call PC Programming Manual 671 5 27 3 10 Conference Group ...

Page 672: ...ial Number Specifies the destination number of each member of the conference group Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 5 28 3 10 Conference Group Member List Programming Manual References 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Conference Group Call Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number...

Page 673: ...Section 6 4 Extension PC Programming Manual 673 ...

Page 674: ...button settings To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically click CLIP Generate Main Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension...

Page 675: ...ature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Exten...

Page 676: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration Telephone Type Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port reference only Value Range DPT 15V DPT 40V DPT is connected APT 15V APT is connected DSS DSS Console is connected VM VPS is connected SLT SLT is connected or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port ISDN Ext I...

Page 677: ...enants call pickup groups and paging groups Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 32 For KX TDE600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 2 2 3 Tenant Service COS Specifies the COS of the extension Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extensi...

Page 678: ...eping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs frequently Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Intercept Destination Extension Number Specifies the extension ...

Page 679: ...ting DND Note that Intercept Routing Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy below Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy...

Page 680: ...tension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Setting...

Page 681: ...nters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing ISDN CLIP Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port C...

Page 682: ...tion Presentation CLIP COLP CLIP on Extension CO Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party s telephone Value Range Extension Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab CO Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port or 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Set...

Page 683: ... Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller s telephone display when answering a call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification...

Page 684: ...xtension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established To enable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting When changing the port type of an extension port in DPT Type Type on the 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port screen the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted first Value Range Max 5 digits consisting...

Page 685: ... Voice Processing Systems VPS with DTMF Integration Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfe...

Page 686: ...ramming Manual References 10 6 8 5 Carrier Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Option 2 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port C...

Page 687: ...ilt in speaker W OHCA Voice from the handset Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 1 8 4 1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY Automatic C Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk doorphone calls and calls via an incoming ...

Page 688: ...A Recall Tone Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start Feature Guide References 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Pickup Dial No Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off hook when the Hot Line feature is active Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None ...

Page 689: ...ts consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual Reference...

Page 690: ...cutive Override Deny Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions Value Range Disable Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override ...

Page 691: ...alue Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management Intercom Call by Voice Selects the method of receiving intercom calls When Deny Voice Call is selected the extension will always ring when receiving calls regardless of how the caller wants to make the cal...

Page 692: ...1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off hook to make a call Value Range No Line No line is seized Idle An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups ICM PDN An extension line is seized or for a PDN extension an idle PDN button is selected F 1 ...

Page 693: ...ing Line The longest ringing call is selected PDN The call arriving at any PDN button is selected F 1 F 84 The call arriving at a flexible button F 1 F 84 is selected A flexible button customised as a Single CO Group CO Loop CO or ICD Group button must be selected Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexi...

Page 694: ... Answer Mode Specifies whether the extension s mailbox is monitored in Hands free or Private mode Value Range Hands free Monitor through the built in speaker Private Monitor through the handset or the built in speaker after hearing a warning tone Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 1 Hands free O...

Page 695: ...s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Display Language Selects the display language of the extension telephone Value Range Language1 Language5 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 4 Display Infor...

Page 696: ... Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 4 Display Information Key Pad Tone Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialling Value Range Off On Maintenance Cons...

Page 697: ... 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback Option 6 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Conn...

Page 698: ...ion Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation or only the One touch Dialling buttons When the mode is set to One touch Dial there is no need to enter 2 before the number when customising a One touch Dialling button Value Range No Limitation One to...

Page 699: ...sion Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Display Lock SVM Lock Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log and Simplified Voice Message Log display i e specifies whether other extension users can see the Incoming Call Log and SVM Log information at the extension Value Range Unlock Lock Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Setti...

Page 700: ...e Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

Page 701: ...during a trunk conversation Value Range EFA Terminate Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension s Incoming Call Log memory Va...

Page 702: ...al References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode When Automatic is selected the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the extension s telephone type as follows PT Speech SLT Audio Value Range Automatic Speech Audio Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Featu...

Page 703: ...xtension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group CW w o Tone Ring after Call Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on hook for the previous call Value Range Dis...

Page 704: ... after the previous unanswered call When receiving two calls in quick succession e g when a call waiting in a queue is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing some SLTs require a pause after the first call stops ringing to receive the second call s Caller ID information Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension...

Page 705: ... 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Value Range 0 3000 s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Wrap up Timer 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out...

Page 706: ...N extension an extension with one or more PDN buttons Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Built in Communication Assistant Specifies whether to enable or dis...

Page 707: ...eferred FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guid...

Page 708: ...ng FWD FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Mode for Call from Extensi...

Page 709: ...e Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD No Answer Time Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Pro...

Page 710: ...destination via FWD N A or FWD Busy N A Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 710 PC Programming Manual 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings ...

Page 711: ...es 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of wired extensions Value Range 1 total number of connected wired extensions Maintenance Console Location 6 2 4 ...

Page 712: ...sole Location 6 2 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Parameter Tail of ID Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Consol...

Page 713: ...Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP PC Programming Manual 713 6 2 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate ...

Page 714: ...n 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Forward DND For internal calls Specifies the FWD DND setting for internal calls If Always All Busy No Answer or Busy No Answer is selected the FWD destination field can be set If For both external calls and internal calls is checked this setting bec...

Page 715: ...eed Dialling number to call using the Personal Speed Dialling Directory shown on the extension s display Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 4 4 1 3 Wired Extension Speed Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Dialling Number Specifies the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed Dialling number Value Range...

Page 716: ...ttons see 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons in the Feature Guide Display Option Key Setting Type Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button Value Range Not Stored Loop CO Single CO Group CO DSS One touch ICD Group Message Waiting FWD DND Both FWD DND External FWD DND Internal Group Fwd Both Group Fwd External Group Fwd Internal Account Conference Terminate EFA Charge Call Park Call Log Log ...

Page 717: ...00 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection for Call Park Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone Value Range Automatic Specific Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button P...

Page 718: ... 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Parameter Selection for Time Service Selects which time modes are switched manually Value Range All Day Night Lunch Break Day Night Break Day Night Lunch Day Night Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Featur...

Page 719: ... KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Parameter Selection for SDN Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings No Ring Mainte...

Page 720: ...ng extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Message Waiting Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for w...

Page 721: ...red Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Extension Number for Group Fwd External Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexi...

Page 722: ... number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed If the cell is left empty the extension will display its own call log information Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Log in Log out Specifies th...

Page 723: ...ences None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Extension Number for Two way Record Specifies the floating extension number of the VM DPT group containing the extension s mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integ...

Page 724: ...ion 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Extension Number for SDN Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to fun...

Page 725: ... a maximum of 2000 with the KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or 5000 with the KX TDE600 One touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling Dial ...

Page 726: ...Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Label Name Specifies the name of each flexible button on the KX NT366 IP PT The name specified here is displayed on the LCD for each button A maximum of 48 flexible buttons can be customised for ...

Page 727: ...nge KX DT300 series except KX DT321 KX T7600 series except KX T7665 IP PT except KX NT265 KX NT321 1 30 KX DT321 KX T7665 KX NT265 KX NT321 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 1 is heard Other telephones 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 2 is heard Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Ref...

Page 728: ...lue Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Display Option Key Setting Key Label Name The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible buttons according to the telephone you are using Click a f...

Page 729: ... Fwd Both Extension Number for Group Fwd External Extension Number for Group Fwd Internal Extension Number for Call Log Extension Number for Log in Log out Extension Number for Hurry up Extension Number for Two way Record Extension Number for Two way Transfer Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Extension Number for SDN Feature Guide References None Dial This parameter is equivalent to Dial on...

Page 730: ...matic Manual Parameter Selection for SDN Feature Guide References None Parameter 2 This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number f...

Page 731: ...ton Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Colour of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button Click Choose to select a colour Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Man...

Page 732: ... size of the font on the label for the corresponding button Value Range 4 15 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Telephone Type Telephone Type Selects the type of telephone for which you want to print a key label template Value Range T7633 T7636 T7625 T7630 NT136 T7665 NT265 NT321 T7667 APT NT343 NT...

Page 733: ...aintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 733 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button ...

Page 734: ...e extensions can be selected To select all extensions at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 6 6 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible button data copy Programming Manual References 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References N...

Page 735: ...ouch access Value Range Not Stored One Touch Maintenance Console Location 6 7 4 1 5 Wired Extension PF Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Dial Specifies the number to be dialled Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 7 4 1 5 Wired Extension PF Button Programming Manual ...

Page 736: ...tatus data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 6 8 4 1 6 Wired Extension NDSS Link Data Send Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Dire...

Page 737: ...dicates the shelf type and or position reference only Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console ...

Page 738: ... 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Feature Guide References None Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extensi...

Page 739: ...e recording space are available for each extension Value Range None Card1 A Card1 B Card2 A Card2 B Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Maximum SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages not including greeting messages that can be stored for the extension Value Range 1 100 Maint...

Page 740: ...ups click Extension User Group Table See 5 7 3 2 User Group for more details Main Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies th...

Page 741: ...he PS belongs The extension user group is used to compose tenants call pickup groups and paging groups Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 32 For KX TDE600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 2 2 3 Tenant Service COS Specifies the COS of the PS Value Range 1 6...

Page 742: ...rotect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs frequently Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identificatio...

Page 743: ... the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing No Answer and Intercept Routing DND Note that Intercept Routing Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy below Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6...

Page 744: ...Routing Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Ma...

Page 745: ...rtable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing ISDN CLIP Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station E...

Page 746: ...Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP CLIP on Extension CO Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party s telephone Value Range Extension Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab CO Show the CLIP number specified in ...

Page 747: ...Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller s telephone display when answering a call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Co...

Page 748: ...one Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable St...

Page 749: ...4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period Value Range Max 5 digits consis...

Page 750: ...n Code Entry 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Option 2 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value ...

Page 751: ...nces 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Automatic C Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk a doorphone call or a call via an incoming call distribution group Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Pickup Dial Set Sets or cancels th...

Page 752: ... Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Option 3 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Porta...

Page 753: ...other extension users to pick up calls to your PS Enable Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Executive Override Deny Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions Value Range Disable Allows other ext...

Page 754: ...None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Absent Message Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the PS When this limit is reached the PS cannot be used to make further trunk calls The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 755: ...Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off hook to make a call Value Range No Line No line is seized Idle An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups ICM PDN An extension line is seized or for a PDN extension an idle PDN button is selec...

Page 756: ...g Line The longest ringing call is selected PDN The call arriving at any PDN button is selected F 1 F 12 The call arriving at a flexible button F 1 F 12 is selected A flexible button customised as a Single CO Group CO Loop CO or ICD Group button must be selected Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Fle...

Page 757: ...nual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Option 5 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Na...

Page 758: ...table Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 4 Display Information Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS s display Value Range Caller ID Name CO Line Name DDI DID Name Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide ...

Page 759: ...rmation Option 6 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Consol...

Page 760: ...uch Dial Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling SVM Lock Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other extensions Value Range Lock Unlock Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programm...

Page 761: ...cifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters Value Range Table 1 Standard mode Table 2 Option mode Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 762: ...call Terminate 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS s Incoming Call Log memory Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number ...

Page 763: ...ch Audio Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Option 8 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Setti...

Page 764: ...that the extension goes on hook for the previous call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Wrap up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution...

Page 765: ...on number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settin...

Page 766: ... Value Range Disable Basic Only Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 Port Number Built in Communication Assistant Server Feature Guide References 1 32 3 CA Communication Assistant FWD DND Reference Call Forwarding FWD and D...

Page 767: ...ngs Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None FWD Mode for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range None FWD All FWD Busy FWD N A FWD Busy N A Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Fea...

Page 768: ...eference only Value Range None FWD All FWD Busy FWD N A FWD Busy N A Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range Max 3...

Page 769: ...tion FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Keep ring after FWD NA to CO Specifies whether a PS continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD N A or FWD Busy N A Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature...

Page 770: ...ces 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of PS extensions Value Range 1 total number of connected wired extensions Maintenance Console Location 6 11 4 2 1...

Page 771: ...e Location 6 11 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Parameter Tail of ID Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Conso...

Page 772: ...Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 772 PC Programming Manual 6 11 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings CLIP Generate ...

Page 773: ...table Station FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Forward DND For internal calls Specifies the FWD DND setting for internal calls If Always All Busy No Answer or Busy No Answer is selected the FWD destination field can be set If For both external calls and internal calls is checked this setting becomes unavailab...

Page 774: ...nal Group Fwd Both Group Fwd External Group Fwd Internal Account Conference Terminate EFA Charge Call Park Log in Log out Hurry up Wrap up Time Service TRS Level Change ISDN Service CLIR COLR ISDN Hold Time Service Automatic Manual Two way Record Two way Transfer LCS Voice Mail Transfer NDSS CTI PDN SDN Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual Ref...

Page 775: ...l Park Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone Value Range Automatic Specific Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 2 Call Park Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs ...

Page 776: ...Night Lunch Break Day Night Break Day Night Lunch Day Night Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change Specifies the TRS Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS Value Range 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Fle...

Page 777: ...an SDN button The value specified here is only used when System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD on 4 18 2 9 System Options is set to Enable Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with ...

Page 778: ...xible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Message Waiting Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked If this cell is left empty the PS will check its own messages only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3...

Page 779: ...xtension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Extension Number for Group Fwd Internal Specifies the floating extension number o...

Page 780: ...e Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Hurry up Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected Manual Queue Redirection Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Que...

Page 781: ...ax 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of the VM DTMF DPT group containing the desired mailbox Value Range Max 8 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Con...

Page 782: ...es 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial for One touch Specifies the number to be dia...

Page 783: ... Feature Guide References 1 21 1 12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial for NDSS Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table can be specified here Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash ...

Page 784: ...when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection for Call Park on this screen set to Specific is pressed Value Range 0 99 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 2 Call Park Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations ...

Page 785: ...eter is equivalent to Extension Number on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Extension Number for DSS Extension Number for ICD Group Extension Number for Message Waiting Extension Number for Group Fwd Both Extension Number for Group Fwd E...

Page 786: ...ocation 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Single CO Parameter Selection for Group CO Parameter Selection for Call Park Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Parameter Selection for Time Service Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change Parameter Selection for Time ...

Page 787: ...ng Tone Type Number for Call Park Feature Guide References None Mailbox Number This parameter is equivalent to Ext No of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer Feature Guide References None PC...

Page 788: ...d To select all PSs at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 6 14 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Flexible button data copy Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References None 788 PC Programming Manual ...

Page 789: ...us data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 6 15 4 2 4 Portable Station NDSS Link Data Send Programming Manual References 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network ...

Page 790: ...e Console Location 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Feature Guide References None Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Extensio...

Page 791: ...n 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Maximum of SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages not including greeting messages that can be stored for the extension Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Messa...

Page 792: ...down list Note that it is necessary to save these settings separately from system data For more information on flexible buttons see 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons in the Feature Guide Pair Extension Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console Note that if one or more SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console they must be deleted before this setting can be changed V...

Page 793: ...or KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 128 For KX TDE600 1 640 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection for Group CO Specifies the trunk group to be accessed Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 64 For KX TDE600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Co...

Page 794: ...g out Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from Value Range None The incoming call distribution group is selected manually All All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to Incoming Group A pre specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Pro...

Page 795: ...ion Value Range 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 9 4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX ...

Page 796: ...ture Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Extension Number for DSS Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for ICD Group Specifies the floating extension num...

Page 797: ...e Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number for Group Fwd Both Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 ...

Page 798: ...tion group for which intercom calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Extension Number for Call Log Specifies the paired extension s number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for...

Page 799: ...erences None Extension Number for Hurry up Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected Manual Queue Redirection Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Extension Number for Two way ...

Page 800: ...d mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of the VM DTMF DPT group containing the desired mailbox Value Range Max 8 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Con...

Page 801: ...Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial for One touch Specifies the number to be dialled The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 with the K...

Page 802: ... Feature Guide References 1 21 1 12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial for NDSS Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table can be specified here Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash ...

Page 803: ...pe Value Range KX DT300 series except KX DT321 KX T7600 series except KX T7665 IP PT except KX NT265 KX NT321 1 30 KX DT321 KX T7665 KX NT265 KX NT321 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 1 is heard Other telephones 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 2 is heard Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References No...

Page 804: ...nsion each time Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Display Option Key Setting Key Label Name The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible DSS buttons according to the DSS Console you are using Click ...

Page 805: ... Fwd Both Extension Number for Group Fwd External Extension Number for Group Fwd Internal Extension Number for Call Log Extension Number for Log in Log out Extension Number for Hurry up Extension Number for Two way Record Extension Number for Two way Transfer Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Extension Number for SDN Feature Guide References None Dial This parameter is equivalent to Dial on...

Page 806: ...rvice Automatic Manual Parameter Selection for SDN Feature Guide References None Parameter 2 This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service Optional Paramet...

Page 807: ...onding button Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Colour of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button Click Choose to select a colour Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guid...

Page 808: ...References None Font Size Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button Value Range 4 15 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSS Type DSS Type Selects the type of DSS Console for which you want to print a key label template Value Range T7640 DT390 Other Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DS...

Page 809: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 809 6 17 4 3 DSS Console ...

Page 810: ...tion DSS Console Select the number of the DSS Console and paired extension Multiple DSS Consoles can be selected To select all DSS Consoles at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 6 18 4 3 DSS Console DSS key data copy Programming Manual References 6 17 4 3 DS...

Page 811: ...Section 7 5 Optional Device PC Programming Manual 811 ...

Page 812: ...sole Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Physical Location Slot Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected reference only Value Range Slot and sub slot number Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Physical Location Port Indi...

Page 813: ...ramming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Cal...

Page 814: ...nd sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions Internal Call Block Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night 4 14 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block Feature Guide References 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block 1 17 1 Doorphone Call VM Trunk Group Number S...

Page 815: ...8 Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration PC Programming Manual 815 7 1 5 1 Doorphone ...

Page 816: ...ue Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 7 2 5 2 External Pager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Paging 1 17 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Page Number 1 Page Number 2 Name Specifies the name of the external pager Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 2 5 2 External Pager Program...

Page 817: ...and trunk calls can be made Trunk Intercom calls and TIE line calls without PBX code can be made TIE line calls with PBX code and trunk calls are restricted All All calls are restricted Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry DISA Security Remote Walking COS through ...

Page 818: ...ts are busy Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use Value Range to Operator to AA 0 to AA 9 Disable Busy Tone Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DISA Intercept Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any ...

Page 819: ...e Message DISA System Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Option 1 CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Public CO Feature Guide References None CO CO with DISA DISA to Private Network Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk to private trunk call using DISA is established To enable this setting CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Private Net...

Page 820: ...Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Option 1 CO CO with DISA DISA to Public CO Feature Guide References None CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Private Network Enables trunk to private trunk calls to be established using DISA Value Range Disable Trunk to private trunk calls are established without using DISA Enable Get DISA Trunk to private trunk calls are established us...

Page 821: ...u by DTMF Enables a trunk caller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing while hearing a ringback reorder or busy tone If disabled retrying the call is possible by pressing Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Option 2 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection Selects the cyclic tone detecti...

Page 822: ...Time Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here the PBX recognises it as a tone on Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to Option To apply changes to this setting follow the steps below 1 Change this setting 2 Set the stat...

Page 823: ...ng Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide References None DISA Cyclic Tone Option Repeating Times of ON OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times the tone pattern a set of tone on and tone off must be received to establish reception of the cyclic tone This determines the end of call Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection o...

Page 824: ...ilable on the card To apply changes to this setting follow the steps below 1 Change this setting 2 Set the status of the OPB3 card to OUS then INS Value Range Low About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded per card Middle About 60 minutes of messages can be recorded per card High About 20 minutes of messages can be recorded per card Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA Syst...

Page 825: ... Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Name Specifies the name of the OGM Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 6 Direct Inward Syst...

Page 826: ... or sets DND Value Range None 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Fax Extension Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when a fax signal is detected Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Lo...

Page 827: ...Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Automatic Fax Transfer PC Programming Manual 827 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message ...

Page 828: ...lot Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Card No 1 2 Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM feature Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Card...

Page 829: ...rded Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Remote Access Selects whether the Walking COS feature can be used while listening to a greeting message from the SVM feature Using Wal...

Page 830: ...ves is optional as specified in SVM Cyclic Tone Option on this screen Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Cyclic Tone Option Tone On Maximum Time Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX When the tone sent from the tel...

Page 831: ... or OPB3 card to OUS then INS See 3 5 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property or 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Value Range 20 n n 6 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Cyclic Tone Option Repeating Times of ON OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times the ton...

Page 832: ...Feature Guide References 1 17 7 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 832 PC Programming Manual 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM ...

Page 833: ... External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 10 External Relay Control Physical Location Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 10 External Relay Control Physical Location Slot Indicates the slot ...

Page 834: ... Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 10 External Relay Control Name Specifies the relay name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References None 834 PC Programming Manual 7 6 5 4 External R...

Page 835: ...10 External Relay Control COS Number Specifies the Class of Service COS number COS programming determines the extensions that are able to activate relays Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions External Relay Access Feature Guide References 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Bloc...

Page 836: ...0 1 16 For KX TDE600 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor Physical Location Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External S...

Page 837: ...ndicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor Name Specifies the sensor name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None PC Programming Manual 837 7 7 5 5 External Sensor ...

Page 838: ...None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor Tenant No Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs to determine the Time Table for the sensor The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature ...

Page 839: ...Section 8 6 Feature PC Programming Manual 839 ...

Page 840: ...rammed Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed Dialling Table or the additional table depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 8 6 6 6 Tenant Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Basic Memory the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1 8 additional tables For KX TDE600 Basic Memory the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1 32 additional tables Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 841: ...fies the CLI destination extension to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are routed If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used the modified number must match the telephone number above CO Line Access Number Telephone Number in order for the call to be routed correctly Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Progr...

Page 842: ...RY 1 27 2 Room Status Control SMDR for External Hotel Application 1 Room Status Control Selects whether check in and check out data is output on SMDR Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 13 1 11 1 Main Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 27 2 Room Status Control SMDR for External Hotel Appli...

Page 843: ...ge is selected from an extension This character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing Message Value Range Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 13 1 11 1 Main Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 26 2 Printing Message Bill Checkout Billing Billing for Guest Activates call billing features ...

Page 844: ...ng for Guest Room Checkout Billing LCD for Minibar Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges Value Range Max 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing LCD for Others Specifies the name of c...

Page 845: ...cters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing Bill SMDR for Minibar Specifies the name of charge item 2 as printed on the guest bill Value Range Max 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 ...

Page 846: ...s the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature Value Range Language 1 Language 5 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application Header 1 3 Specifies the text printed at the top of the guest bill Value Range Max...

Page 847: ...uest Room Charge Margin Tax Margin Rate for Telephone Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill Value Range 0 00 99 99 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin Tax Tax Rate for Telephone Specifies the percentag...

Page 848: ...99 99 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin Tax Tax Rate for Others Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 3 Value Range 0 00 99 99 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Re...

Page 849: ...urrency Specifies the currency characters shown on the display of the extension and the SMDR Value Range Max 3 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Budget Management Feature Guide Refe...

Page 850: ...d and then the call is disconnected Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management Charge Options Meter Start on Answer Detection Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge wh...

Page 851: ...Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services PC Programming Manual 851 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge ...

Page 852: ...sole Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry User Name Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Verification Code PIN Speci...

Page 853: ... Number Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Itemised Billing Code for ARS Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS fe...

Page 854: ... on the verification code The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management 854 PC Programming Manual 8 3 6 3 Verification Code ...

Page 855: ...s of codes click the applicable tab Second Dial Tone Waiting Code Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 8 4 6 4 Second Dial Tone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Pause Repeating Counter Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial to...

Page 856: ... maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed and any extension user can select one of them Absent Message Specifies the message for display Value Range Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 5 6 5 Absent Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Absent Message 856 PC Programming Manual 8 5 6 5 Absent Message ...

Page 857: ...BGM7 Tone For KX TDE series Same as System Setting BGM BGM2 BGM3 BGM4 BGM5 BGM6 BGM7 BGM8 Tone Maintenance Console Location 8 6 6 6 Tenant Programming Manual References 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on Hold 2 2 3 Tenant Service Operator Extension Number Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be designat...

Page 858: ...nance Console Location 8 6 6 6 Tenant Programming Manual References 10 1 8 1 System Setting Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 2 3 Tenant Service System Speed Dial Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant Value Range Same as System Setting PBX common system speed dialling numbers are used Tenant Exclusive Individual tenant system speed dialling...

Page 859: ...Section 9 7 TRS PC Programming Manual 859 ...

Page 860: ...ding digits of the dialled number are not found in the applicable Denied Code Tables the call is made A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Denied Code Tables Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of ...

Page 861: ...is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Exception Code Tables Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from toll restriction call barring for each level V...

Page 862: ...mum of 20 with the KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 or 100 with the KX TDE600 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed With the KX TDE600 20 codes are displayed at a time To show other sets of codes click the applicable tab Special Carrier Access Code Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes should be unique Value Range Max 16 dig...

Page 863: ...regarded A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed Emergency Number Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls It is not necessary to start the emergency number with a Trunk Access number Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 9 4 7 4 Emergency Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 ...

Page 864: ...ure Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring TRS Check for Dial Enables a TRS Barring check for the user dialled and This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges Value Range No Check Check Maintenance Console Location 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References ...

Page 865: ...ves a trunk call If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit the line will be disconnected Value Range None 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation TRS Check after EFA Enables TRS Barring to check the digits dialled after External ...

Page 866: ...eny Table 2_N Except Table N_6 The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it Deny Table N Except Table N Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes which are only applied to that level Maintenance Console Location 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Programming Man...

Page 867: ...Section 10 8 ARS PC Programming Manual 867 ...

Page 868: ...on user makes a call using Idle Line Access Trunk Access or S CO Line Access method Maintenance Console Location 10 1 8 1 System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial Selects what happens when the dialled number is not found in Leading Number in 10 2 8 2 Lead...

Page 869: ...f digits of the user dialled number excluding the leading number 100 leading numbers are displayed at a time To display other sets of leading numbers click the applicable tab Leading Number Specifies the leading number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 10 2 8 2 Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic R...

Page 870: ...mber Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 16 For KX TDE600 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 10 2 8 2 Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 870 PC Programming Manual 10 2 8 2 Leading Number ...

Page 871: ...Plan Tables and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan click and drag the divisions between two time periods To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan including adding or deleting time blocks click Time Setting PC Programming Manual 871 10 ...

Page 872: ...Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 4 8 3 Routing Plan Time Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Time A D Hour Minute Specifies the start time for each time block Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 10 4 8 3 Routing Plan Time Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide...

Page 873: ...esired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab Time A Time D Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 None 1 10 For KX TDE600 None 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 10 5 8 4 Routing Plan Priority Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS PC Programming Manual ...

Page 874: ...sole Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user dialled number Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Modify Co...

Page 875: ...consisting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS TRG 01 TRG 64 for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 TRG 01 TRG 96 for KX TDE600 Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier TRG 01 TRG 64 for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 TRG 01 TRG 96 for KX TDE600 ...

Page 876: ...command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab Authorisation Code for Tenant Tenant 1 Tenant 32 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant Note For the KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 only up to 8 tenants are available Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Reference...

Page 877: ...ifferent leading number exceptions can be programmed 40 leading number exception entries are displayed on the screen at a time To display other sets click the applicable tab Leading Number Exception Specifies the leading number exception Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 10 7 8 6 Leading Number Exception Programming Manual References None Feature Guide ...

Page 878: ... groups click the applicable tab Authorisation Code for Trunk Group TRG 01 TRG 64 for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 TRG 01 TRG 96 for KX TDE600 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 8 8 7 Authorisation Code for TRG Programming Manual References 10 6 8 5 Carrier Carrier Modify ...

Page 879: ...Section 11 9 Private Network PC Programming Manual 879 ...

Page 880: ...splayed at a time To display other priority sets click the applicable tab Using a private network up to 8 PBXs can share one VPS centralised VM connected to another PBX This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network Only extension numbers of 4 digits or less using the Extension Number Method are supported Own PBX Code Specifies the PBX code of the local P...

Page 881: ...nces None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Trunk Group Specifies the trunk grou...

Page 882: ...or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line network Value Range Max 3 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 QSIG Enhanced Features Enhanced QSIG Call Information Activation Key Required Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the VPS is attached to extens...

Page 883: ...Maintenance Console Location 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 QSIG Enhanced Features PC Programming Manual 883 11 1 9 1 TIE Table ...

Page 884: ...e Network ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems Changing this value in Interactive mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data Value Range 0 The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs 1 The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs 2 8 The PBX transmits BLF data over the network Maintenance Console Location 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Programming Manual Refer...

Page 885: ... 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Data Transmission Counter Specifies the maximum number of hops or transmissions between two PBXs before a packet of BLF data is discarded Value Range 1 63 Maintenance Console Location 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Dire...

Page 886: ... being cancelled Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Activation Key Required Feature Guide References 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Timer Specifies the length of time between repeated re t...

Page 887: ...g Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Activation Key Required Feature Guide References 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail PC Programming Manual 887 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission ...

Page 888: ...itor PBX can be specified here Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 3 9 3 Network Operator VoIP Programming Manual References 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS IP GW Card Slot No to notify BLF data to Network O...

Page 889: ...Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS PC Programming Manual 889 11 3 9 3 Network Operator VoIP ...

Page 890: ... extension attached to another PBX that will be monitored The number input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Netwo...

Page 891: ...on is connected to reference only Value Range None 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS PC Programming Manual 891 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table ...

Page 892: ...892 PC Programming Manual 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table ...

Page 893: ...Section 12 10 CO Incoming Call PC Programming Manual 893 ...

Page 894: ...he shelf type and or position to which each trunk card belongs reference only Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card reference only Value Range Slot number M...

Page 895: ...onnected reference only Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Name Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the extension s display when receiving a call from the trunk Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None ...

Page 896: ... card is installed the value is automatically set to 7 for the corresponding trunks Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 64 For KX TDE600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 896 PC Programming Manual 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings ...

Page 897: ...tion is set different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode day lunch break night Generally DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue trunks Tenant number and VM trunk group number can also be programmed for each trunk To assign DIL destination numbers enter directly or click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Shelf Indicates the shelf type ...

Page 898: ...ure Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type reference only Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk reference only Value Range Public Private TIE VPN 898 PC Programming M...

Page 899: ...ds on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI DID Distribution depends on the DDI DID number of the calls MSN Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the DIL destination in e...

Page 900: ...ferences 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service VM Trunk Group No Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DIL destination is the floating extension number of a VM DPT Group The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller Value Range 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table ...

Page 901: ... type and or position reference only Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 Physical Virtual For KX TDE600 Shelf number Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1...

Page 902: ...intenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk reference only Value Range Public Private TIE VPN Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None 902 PC Programming Manual 1...

Page 903: ... 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY CLI Ring for DIL Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 1 ...

Page 904: ...eferences None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings 904...

Page 905: ...etworking type of each trunk reference only Value Range Public Private TIE VPN Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls The value range o...

Page 906: ...igit Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI DID distribution or for TIE line service Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 30 1 T...

Page 907: ...ngs Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 30 1 TIE Line Service PC Programming Manual 907 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings ...

Page 908: ...2 1 6 Extension Number Setting It is possible to programme DDI DID numbers and DDI DID destinations in each time mode day lunch break night for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration or to programme DDI DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate DDI DID Number Specifies the DDI DID number Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9...

Page 909: ...c Registration Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Programming Man...

Page 910: ...References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration CLI Ring for DDI DID Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Programming Manual References 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Dire...

Page 911: ...ect Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Generate DDI DID Number From Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed DDI DID numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 4 10 3 DDI DID Table Automatic Registration Programming Man...

Page 912: ...for a certain time mode click the appropriate Same all check box If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked the destination numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location for that time mode Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 4 10 3 DDI DID Table Automatic Registration...

Page 913: ...es 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed Value Range 1 1000 Maintenance Console Location 12 5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In D...

Page 914: ...5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Name Suffix Specifies the text to be included at the end of each DDI DID name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table...

Page 915: ...ers Select the card to programme or select All to display all matching cards MSN To assign MSN destination numbers enter directly or click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual Re...

Page 916: ...nd Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service MSN Name Specifies the name for the MSN which is shown on the extension s display when receiving a call with the MSN Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Progr...

Page 917: ...umber Specifies the tenant number to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day Value Range For KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 1 8 For KX TDE600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port 4 6 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN...

Page 918: ...d to the CLI destinations instead of the MSN destinations if the caller s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode day lunch break night on a trunk basis Shelf KX TDE600 only Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Lo...

Page 919: ... Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CLI Ring for MSN Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Id...

Page 920: ...ination Maintenance Console Location 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Intercept Routing to Operator No Destination Destination is not programmed Enables the Intercept Routing No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the call The Intercept Routing No Destination feature...

Page 921: ...ting feature to operate for extension calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination PC Programming Manual 921 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous ...

Page 922: ...922 PC Programming Manual 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous ...

Page 923: ...Section 13 11 Maintenance PC Programming Manual 923 ...

Page 924: ...g Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Port Selects the Serial Interface port that is used to output the SMDR data Value Range None LAN RS 232C Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Page Length Number of L...

Page 925: ... page The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length Value Range 0 95 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Date Format Selects the printed date format Value Range MM DD YY DD MM YY YY MM DD YY DD MM Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1...

Page 926: ... dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed Class of Service COS programming determines the printable records Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Outgoing CO Call Printout SMDR Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Print Information Incoming Ca...

Page 927: ...int Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Print Information Log in Log out Specifies whether the log in log out status is printed Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out 1 2...

Page 928: ...l Print Information Timed Reminder Wake up Call Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Print Information Error Log Specifies whether PBX error log information is output ...

Page 929: ...tion 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Option Caller ID Number Name Selects the printing format of caller identifications for incoming trunk calls Value Range None Number Name Name Numbe...

Page 930: ...et Print Dialled Number Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 1 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Option Privacy Mode Selects whether private dialling is enabled or disabled and how many digits to hide when enabled To enable this setting Print Information Outgoing Call on the SMDR ...

Page 931: ...d Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Option Condition Code AN Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide R...

Page 932: ...ure Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR LAN SMDR Port Number Specifies the port number used to output SMDR data via the LAN Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR LAN SMDR Password Specifies the password used to output the SMDR data via the...

Page 933: ...re Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR RS 232C Communication Baud Rate Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer To ensure stable transmission when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps set Communication Flow on this screen to Hardware Value Range 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Main...

Page 934: ...acter Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer Value Range None Mark Space Even Odd Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Communication Word Length Specifies the number of bits in each byte of a character When connecting the Mainten...

Page 935: ...lue Range None Hardware Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Communication Stop Bit Selects a stop bit code that indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer Value Range 1 bit 2 bit Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11...

Page 936: ...fies the command to manually initialise an external modem The command specified here is controlled by PT system programming External Modem Control 801 Value Range Max 30 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming Maintenance Local Alarm Display Extension 1 Extension 2 Specifies the extension numbers of PTs...

Page 937: ...heck of the PBX for local alarm and error log Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time Hour Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time Value Range 0 23 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None PC Programmi...

Page 938: ...ta Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Counter in 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Activation Key Required 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data Re transmis...

Page 939: ...he PBX to output local alarm information to a syslog server Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 2 Syslog Record Management Syslog Syslog Server IP Address Specifies the IP address of a syslog server Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual ...

Page 940: ...put minor alarm information to a syslog server Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 2 Syslog Record Management Remote Remote Analogue Remote Modem Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for analogue remote maintenance To enable this setting an RMT card must be installed a...

Page 941: ... this screen must be enabled Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming Remote Remote Programming Enables system programming diagnosis and data upload from a remote location Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References ...

Page 942: ...ss the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes This number can be specified by Quick Setup Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 4 Quick Setup Password Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer System Password PT ...

Page 943: ...ge 4 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 2 PT Programming Manager Password PT Programming Prog 1 Specifies the manager password to authorise the PT user to access manager programming Value Range 4 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual Refe...

Page 944: ...ifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at Administrator Level This password can only be set in Interactive mode Value Range 4 10 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming System Password PC Programming Installer Level Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console a...

Page 945: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming PC Programming Manual 945 13 1 11 1 Main ...

Page 946: ...ference only Value Range 000 999 Maintenance Console Location 13 2 11 2 PT Programming Access Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 2 PT Programming PROG Selects whether User Level PT users can access each system programming item Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 2 11 2 PT Programming Access Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 947: ...ch to set connections from the Shelf list Note that PFT connections can only be made within the same shelf Trunk Card Slot No Specifies the position of the trunk card to be used Value Range For KX NCP500 None Small Free Slot 1 Small Free Slot 2 Small Free Slot 3 For KX NCP1000 None Small Free Slot 1 Small Free Slot 2 Small Free Slot 3 Small Free Slot 4 For KX TDE series None 1 11 Maintenance Conso...

Page 948: ...tenance Console Location 13 3 11 3 Power Failure Transfer Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 1 Power Failure Transfer 948 PC Programming Manual 13 3 11 3 Power Failure Transfer ...

Page 949: ...sole Location 13 4 11 4 1 SNMP System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor Port Number Receive Specifies the port number used to receive SNMP data requests from an SNMP manager Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 13 4 11 4 1 SNMP System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide R...

Page 950: ... Location 13 4 11 4 1 SNMP System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor MIB SysLocation Specifies a physical location for the system Value Range Max 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 4 11 4 1 SNMP System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Man...

Page 951: ... Location 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor Community Name Specifies a community name of an SNMP manager Value Range Max 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protoc...

Page 952: ...tion 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor TRAP Authentication Failure Selects whether the PBX sends Authentication Failure TRAP to an SNMP manager or not Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 953: ...ide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor TRAP Alarm Minor Selects whether the PBX sends Minor Alarm TRAP to an SNMP manager or not Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 5 11 4 2 SNMP Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 4 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP System Monitor PC Programming Manual 953 13 5 1...

Page 954: ...row to select them for addition 4 Click OK Deleting CSs Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the air synchronisation group 1 Click Delete A dialogue box will appear Registered CSs are displayed on the left 2 Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion 3 Click OK Index Indicates the CS number reference only Value Range 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Syn...

Page 955: ...Slot number Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 955 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation ...

Page 956: ... desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Indicates whether a certain CS is registered reference only Value Range Registered Maintenance ...

Page 957: ... Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Primary CS Index Specifies the number of the primary CS Value Range 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Primary CS Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary CS reference only P...

Page 958: ...ference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Primary CS CS Name Indicates the name of the primary CS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None 958 PC Programming Manual 13 6 11 5 Air Sync...

Page 959: ...ry CS Slot Indicates the slot position of the secondary CS reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Secondary CS Port Indicates the port number of the secondary CS reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation PC Programming M...

Page 960: ... CS CS Name Indicates the name of the secondary CS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 960 PC Programming Manual 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation ...

Page 961: ...Section 14 Appendix PC Programming Manual 961 ...

Page 962: ...KX TDE series OGM No BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 7 for KX NCP series Music Source of BGM3 8 for KX TDE series Card 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Air Synchronisation Watching Degeneracy 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Find Next feature 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Changed Contents 1 2 1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console Starting the Maintenance Con...

Page 963: ...tension First Digit Dial Extension Inter digit 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Wireless XDP 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Maximum length of extension number 8 6 6 6 Tenant Music On Hold PC Programming Manual 963 14 1 1 KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2 0xxx ...

Page 964: ... cards 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 VoIP DSP Option IP Extension Count of BGM 3 11 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway GW Settings 3 12 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway DN2IP 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Assistant Transfer to busy Extension w o BSS Operation 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 Send CL...

Page 965: ...PDF Output 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation PC Programming Manual 965 14 1 2 KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 4 1xxx ...

Page 966: ...ot 3 9 1 1 Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM 10 6 8 5 Carrier Authorisation Code for Tenan...

Page 967: ...vation Key 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only 3 61 1 2 Portable Station 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings PC Programming Manual 967 14 1 4 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2 01xx ...

Page 968: ...perator BGM BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 7 for KX NCP series Music Source of BGM3 8 for KX TDE series OGM No BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 7 for KX NCP series Music Source of BGM3 8 for KX TDE series Card 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Air Synchronisation Watching Degeneracy 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Broadcast Mode 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Chan...

Page 969: ...N2IP 3 14 1 1 Slot Card Property Virtual IP Extension 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is transferred to CO CLIP of Held Party Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is forwarded to CO 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 6 12 4 2 2 Portable ...

Page 970: ... 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Centralised VM Unit Setting Changed Contents 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 VoIP DSP Option IP Extension Count of BGM 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Assistant Transfer to busy Extension w o BSS Operation 5 27 3 10 Conference Group 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings FWD DND 6 5 ...

Page 971: ...n Hold Music Source of BGM2 7 for KX NCP series Music Source of BGM3 8 for KX TDE series OGM No BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 7 for KX NCP series Music Source of BGM3 8 for KX TDE series Card 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Air Synchronisation Watching Degeneracy 5 27 3 10 Conference Group Broadcast Mode 13 6 11 5 Air Synchronisation Changed Contents 1 2 1 Installing and Starting the Maintena...

Page 972: ...7 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only 3 61 1 2 Portable Station 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is transferred to CO CLIP of Held Party Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is forwarded to CO 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Exten...

Page 973: ...n 6 CTI CTI Hold Forced Idle when Hold by PDN SDN Key 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Centralised VM Unit Setting Changed Contents 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property IPCMPR for KX NCP500 KX NCP1000 KX TDE100 KX TDE200 IPCEMPR for KX TDE600 VoIP DSP Option IP Extension Count of BGM 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Assistant Transfer to busy Extension w o BSS Operation 5 27 3 10 Conference Gro...

Page 974: ...974 PC Programming Manual 14 1 8 KX TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 4 1xxx ...

Page 975: ...Feature Programming References PC Programming Manual 975 ...

Page 976: ... CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY Feature Guide References 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Automatic Callback Busy Cancel 4 11 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Automatic Callback Busy Feature Guide References 1 8 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Automatic Extension Release 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Di...

Page 977: ...Feature Guide References 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Budget Management 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Budget Management 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Charge Charge Options Action at Charge Limit Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management Built in Simplified Voice Message ...

Page 978: ... end talk 5 6 3 1 5 Trunk Group Charge Rate 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Charge Margin Tax Margin Rate for Telephone Margin Tax Tax Rate for Telephone Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point Charge Options Currency Charge Options Currency Display Position Charge Options Action at Cha...

Page 979: ...anager Group Forward Set Optional Device Other Extensions Remote Operation by Other Extension 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main CO CO Duration Time 60s Extension CO Duration Time 60s 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Log Group FWD 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings FWD DND 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Setting...

Page 980: ... Recall 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Call Park Call Park Retrieve 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Parameter Selec...

Page 981: ...F Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY Feature Guide References 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN Call Transfer CT by QSIG 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 35 1 1 S...

Page 982: ...ings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Option 2 Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type Feature Guide References 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone Caller ID 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Caller ID Waiting to receive Caller ID Visual Caller ID Display 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 Private Network Public Call through Private Network Minimum Public Caller ID Digits 4 19 2 10...

Page 983: ...OLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port CO Setting Subscriber Number Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Subscriber Number 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Subscriber Number 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features COLR Set Cancel...

Page 984: ...nces 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Centralised Voice Mail 3 62 1 3 Option New Card Installation ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Centralised VM Unit Setting 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network MSW Data Transm...

Page 985: ...NR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E E911 3PTY CCBS Type CCBS Delete Digits Feature Guide References 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COL...

Page 986: ...rence Group Member List Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Conference Group Call Confirmation Tone 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 1 Called by Voice Confirmation Tone Tone 2 Paged Automatic Answer Confirmation Tone Tone 3 1 Start Talking after Making Call Call from Doorphone Confirmation Tone Tone 3 2 Start Talking after Answering Call Confirmation Tone Tone 4 1 Start Conferen...

Page 987: ... 38 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port CO Dial Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port CO Dial Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Dialling Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only Dialling Mode DTMF Width CO Pulse Speed Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Direct ...

Page 988: ...s Counters Miscellaneous Extension PIN Lock Counter 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions Accept the Call from DISA 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Tone Detection DISA Tone Detection Silence DISA Tone Detection Continuous DISA Tone Detection Cyclic 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When called party does ...

Page 989: ... References 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Door Open 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Device Type 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf Doorphone Open Duration 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Door Open 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions Door Unlock Feature Guide References 1 17 2 Door Open Doorphone Call 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters DISA Door Remind...

Page 990: ...ial Lock Off Remote Extension Dial Lock On 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level on Extension Lock Feature Guide References 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock Extension Feature Clear 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Extension Feature Clear 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 2 Extension Clear Call Waiting Extension Clear Fwd DND Extension Clear Hot Line Pickup Dial Feature Guide Reference...

Page 991: ...cellaneous TRS Check after EFA Feature Guide References 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA External Relay Control 3 58 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Device Type 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features External Relay Access 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions External Relay Access 7 6 5 4 External Relay Feature Guide References 1 17 10 External Relay Control Exter...

Page 992: ... 20 2 Flexible Buttons Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Extension Features Other PBX Extension 4 10 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial 4 11 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Feature Guide References 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Floating Extension 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Extension 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main...

Page 993: ...Number for Group Fwd Both Extension Number for Group Fwd External Extension Number for Group Fwd Internal 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Extension Number for Group Fwd Both Extension Number for Group Fwd External Extension Number for Group Fwd Internal Feature Guide References 1 3 1 4 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button Group Section 5 3 Group Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group Group Call Distribution 5 ...

Page 994: ...h Reorder Tone for PT Hands free 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Answer Mode Feature Guide References 1 11 1 Hands free Operation Headset Operation 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Headset OFF ON 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only IP PT Registration and De registration Headset OFF ON 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 6 ...

Page 995: ...ing Call Distribution Group Features Incoming Call Log 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Supervisor Extension Number 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 5 Incoming Call Display Option 6 Display Lock SVM Lock Option 7 Incoming Call Log Memory 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 5 ...

Page 996: ... out Manual Queue Redirection Destination Day Lunch Break Night 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept No Answer Time 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept No Answer Time 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Intercept Routing No Destination 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM PBX Operator Day Lunc...

Page 997: ...sion 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property Virtual IP Extension 3 55 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension KX TDE series only 3 57 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port KX TDE series only Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT ISDN Extension 3 33 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN Extension 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Extension Setting Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 I...

Page 998: ...ption 1 PT Fwd DND Fwd LED Option 1 PT Fwd DND DND LED Option 4 DSS Key DSS key mode for Incoming Call Feature Guide References 1 20 3 LED Indication Line Preference Incoming 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 Incoming Preferred Line 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 Incoming Preferred Line Feature Guide References 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Line Pref...

Page 999: ...ed Extension Extension Settings Option 8 Wrap up Timer 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Extension Number for Log in Log out 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 8 Wrap up Timer 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Extension Number for Log in Log out 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Par...

Page 1000: ... Port Settings DDI DID TIE MSN Distribution Method DDI DID TIE MSN Remove Digit DDI DID TIE MSN Additional Dial 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Music on Hold 4 4 2 2 Operator BGM 4 20 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH MOH MOH Music On Hold for KX NCP series MOH 1 Music On Hold 1 for KX TDE series MOH MOH 2 Music On Hold 2 KX TDE series...

Page 1001: ...t OHCA Whisper OHCA Feature Guide References 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Off hook Monitor 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Operation Off Hook Monitor for KX T74xx T75xx T76xx Feature Guide References 1 11 2 Off hook Monitor One touch Dialling 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 Flexible Button Programming Mode 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Dial for...

Page 1002: ...System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is forwarded to CO Send CLIP of Extension Caller when call is forwarded to CO Feature Guide References 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Overflow Feature 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Overflow Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer 5 15 3 5 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Queuing Time T...

Page 1003: ...ort Property T1 Port Pause Time 3 44 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Pause Time 3 47 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDE series only Pause Time 3 50 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port KX TDE series only Pause Time 4 5 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous During Conversation Pause Signal Time 8 4 6 4 Second Dial Tone Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion PC Phone PC Console 3 24 1 1 Slot Port...

Page 1004: ...ferences 2 4 6 Packet Internet Groper PING Confirmation Portable Station PS Connection 3 61 1 2 Portable Station Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection Power Failure Transfer 13 3 11 3 Power Failure Transfer Feature Guide References 2 4 1 Power Failure Transfer Printing Message 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Printing Message 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Main SMDR for Extern...

Page 1005: ...ns Option 4 System Wireless Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group PT Programming 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Manager Programming Mode Level 13 1 11 1 Main Password System Password PT Programming Prog User Level System Password PT Programming Prog Administrator Level Manager Password PT Programming Prog 1 Feature Guide References 2 ...

Page 1006: ...on Feature Guide References 1 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit Ring Tone Pattern Selection 4 15 2 8 1 Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 4 16 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 4 17 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others Extension Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Operation PT Ring Off Setting 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extensi...

Page 1007: ...e Guide References 2 3 8 Software Upgrading Special Carrier Access Code 9 3 7 3 Special Carrier Feature Guide References 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Speed Dialling Personal System 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features System Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling Programming 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level for System Speed Dialling 6 4 4 1 3 ...

Page 1008: ...6 2 4 Week Table 4 8 2 5 Holiday Table 4 14 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block 5 7 3 2 User Group 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main Tenant Number 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main User Group 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main User Group 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Tenant Number 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Tenant No 8 6 6 6 Tenant Section 10 ...

Page 1009: ...s TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night 4 18 2 9 System Options Option 4 Private Network TIE Call by Extension Numbering Activation Key Required 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main COS 11 1 9 1 TIE Table 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings DIL Trunk Property DIL DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night DDI DID TIE MSN 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table DDI DID Destination Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide Ref...

Page 1010: ...ation 1 Timed Reminder Wake up Call 13 1 11 1 Main SMDR Print Information Timed Reminder Wake up Call Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night TRS Level for System Speed Dialling 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button ...

Page 1011: ...er Selection for Single CO Parameter Selection for Group CO 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Single CO Parameter Selection for Group CO 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Parameter Selection for Single CO Parameter Selection for Group CO 10 1 8 1 System Setting ARS Mode 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings CO Name Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Trunk Answer From...

Page 1012: ...red Extension Extension Settings Option 1 ARS Itemised Code Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 ARS Itemised Code Option 3 Charge Limit 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry VIP Call 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous VIP Call Mode Feature Guide References 1 2 2 5 VIP Call Vir...

Page 1013: ...Mode 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Extension Number for Two way Record Extension Number for Two way Transfer Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Recording Mode 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Extension Number for Two way Record Extension Number for Two way Trans...

Page 1014: ...ce Mail Transfer Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 3 56 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Common Settings KX TDE series only Gateway Address Feature Guide References 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Walking COS 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features User Remote Operation Walking COS Verification Code 4 12 2 7 1 C...

Page 1015: ...less XDP Parallel Mode 3 24 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port DPT Type Type 3 61 1 2 Portable Station PS Registration and De registration 4 9 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set Cancel 4 12 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Wireless ...

Page 1016: ...l is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd 2010 PSQX4753VA KK0808GJ4070 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for KX-NCP1000

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands